1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2009-11-15.11} 7% 8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 32% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 33% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexrbrace=\} 97\let\ptexslash=\/ 98\let\ptexstar=\* 99\let\ptext=\t 100\let\ptextop=\top 101 102% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 103% starts a new line in the output. 104\newlinechar = `^^J 105 106% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 107% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 108% 109\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 110 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 111\else 112 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 113\fi 114 115% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 116\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 117\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 118\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 119\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 120\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 121\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 122\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 123\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 124\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 125\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 126\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 127\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 128\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 129\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 130\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 131\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 132\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 133\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 134\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 135% 136\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 137\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 138\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 139\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 148% 149\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 150\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 151\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 152\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 153\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 154 155% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 156\chardef\spacecat = 10 157\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 158 159% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 160\chardef\colonChar = `\: 161\chardef\commaChar = `\, 162\chardef\dashChar = `\- 163\chardef\dotChar = `\. 164\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 165\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 166\chardef\questChar = `\? 167\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 168\chardef\semiChar = `\; 169\chardef\underChar = `\_ 170 171% Ignore a token. 172% 173\def\gobble#1{} 174 175% The following is used inside several \edef's. 176\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 177 178% Hyphenation fixes. 179\hyphenation{ 180 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 181 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 182 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 183 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 184 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 185 spell-ing spell-ings 186 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 187 wide-spread wrap-around 188} 189 190% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 191\newdimen\bindingoffset 192\newdimen\normaloffset 193\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 194 195% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 196% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 197% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 198% 199\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 200 201% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 202% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 203% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 204% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 205% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 206% 207\def\|{% 208 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 209 \leavevmode 210 % 211 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 212 \vadjust{% 213 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 214 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 215 \vskip-\baselineskip 216 % 217 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 218 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 219 \llap{% 220 % 221 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 222 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 223 % 224 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 225 \hskip 12pt 226 }% 227 }% 228} 229 230% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 231% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 232% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 233% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 234% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 235% 236\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 237\def\loggingall{% 238 \tracingstats2 239 \tracingpages1 240 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 241 \tracingparagraphs1 242 \tracingoutput1 243 \tracingmacros2 244 \tracingrestores1 245 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 246 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 247 \tracingscantokens1 248 \tracingifs1 249 \tracinggroups1 250 \tracingnesting2 251 \tracingassigns1 252 \fi 253 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 254 \errorcontextlines16 255}% 256 257% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 258% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 259% 260\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 261 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 262\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 263 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 264\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 265 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 266 267% For @cropmarks command. 268% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 269% 270\newif\ifcropmarks 271\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 272% 273% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 274% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 275% 276\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 277\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 278\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 279\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 280 281% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 282% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 283% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 284% 285% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 286% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 287% 288% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 289% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 290% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 291% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 292% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 293% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 294\def\domark{% 295 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 296 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 297 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 298 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 299 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 300 \mark{% 301 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 302 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 303 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 304 }% 305} 306% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 307% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 308% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 309% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 310% first @chapter. 311\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 312 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 313 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 314} 315\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 316\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 317 318% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 319\def\lastchapterdefs{} 320\def\lastsectiondefs{} 321\def\prevchapterdefs{} 322\def\prevsectiondefs{} 323\def\lastcolordefs{} 324 325% Main output routine. 326\chardef\PAGE = 255 327\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 328 329\newbox\headlinebox 330\newbox\footlinebox 331 332% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 333% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 334\def\onepageout#1{% 335 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 336 % 337 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 338 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 339 % 340 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 341 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 342 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 343 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 344 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 345 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 346 % 347 {% 348 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 349 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 350 % before the \shipout runs. 351 % 352 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 353 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 354 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 355 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 356 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 357 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 358 % it needs to be 359 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 360 \shipout\vbox{% 361 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 362 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 363 % 364 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 365 \hsize = \outerhsize 366 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 367 \vtop to0pt{% 368 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 369 \nointerlineskip 370 \line{% 371 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 372 \hfill 373 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 374 }% 375 \vss}% 376 \vskip\topandbottommargin 377 \line\bgroup 378 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 379 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 380 \vbox\bgroup 381 \fi 382 % 383 \unvbox\headlinebox 384 \pagebody{#1}% 385 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 386 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 387 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 388 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 389 \vskip 24pt 390 \unvbox\footlinebox 391 \fi 392 % 393 \ifcropmarks 394 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 395 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 396 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 397 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 398 \vbox to0pt{\vss 399 \line{% 400 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 401 \hfill 402 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 403 }% 404 \nointerlineskip 405 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 406 }% 407 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 408 \fi 409 }% end of \shipout\vbox 410 }% end of group with \indexdummies 411 \advancepageno 412 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 413} 414 415\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 416 417\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 418{\catcode`\@ =11 419\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 420% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 421\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 422 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 423\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 424\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 425\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 426} 427 428% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 429% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 430% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 431% 432\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 433\def\nstop{\vbox 434 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 435\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 436\def\nsbot{\vbox 437 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 438 439% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 440% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 441% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 442% 443\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 444\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 445 \def\argtorun{#2}% 446 \begingroup 447 \obeylines 448 \spaceisspace 449 #1% 450 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 451} 452 453{\obeylines % 454 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 455 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 456 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 457 }% 458} 459 460% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 461\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 462\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 463 464% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 465% 466% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 467% @end itemize @c foo 468% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 469% by \finishparsearg. 470% 471\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 472\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 473\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 474 \def\temp{#3}% 475 \ifx\temp\empty 476 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 477 \let\temp\finishparsearg 478 \else 479 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 480 \fi 481 % Put the space token in: 482 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 483} 484 485% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 486% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 487% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 488% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 489% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 490% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 491% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 492% 493% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 494% 495\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 496 497% \parseargdef\foo{...} 498% is roughly equivalent to 499% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 500% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 501% 502% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 503% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 504 505\def\parseargdef#1{% 506 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 507} 508\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 509 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 510 \def#1##1% 511} 512 513% Several utility definitions with active space: 514{ 515 \obeyspaces 516 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 517 518 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 519 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 520 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 521 % should produce a line of output anyway. 522 % 523 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 524 525 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 526 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 527 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 528 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 529} 530 531 532\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 533 534% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 535% 536% \envdef\foo{...} 537% \def\Efoo{...} 538% 539% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 540% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 541% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 542% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 543% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 544% 545% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 546% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 547% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 548% special case.) 549 550 551% At run-time, environments start with this: 552\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 553% initialize 554\let\thisenv\empty 555 556% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 557\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 558\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 559 560% Check whether we're in the right environment: 561\def\checkenv#1{% 562 \def\temp{#1}% 563 \ifx\thisenv\temp 564 \else 565 \badenverr 566 \fi 567} 568 569% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 570\def\badenverr{% 571 \errhelp = \EMsimple 572 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 573 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 574} 575\def\inenvironment#1{% 576 \ifx#1\empty 577 out of any environment% 578 \else 579 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 580 \fi 581} 582 583% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 584% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 585% 586\parseargdef\end{% 587 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 588 \else 589 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 590 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 591 \csname E#1\endcsname 592 \endgroup 593 \fi 594} 595 596\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 597 598 599%% Simple single-character @ commands 600 601% @@ prints an @ 602% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 603\def\@{{\tt\char64}} 604 605% This is turned off because it was never documented 606% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 607%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 608%% but suppressing ligatures. 609%\def\`{{`}} 610%\def\'{{'}} 611 612% Used to generate quoted braces. 613\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 614\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 615\let\{=\mylbrace 616\let\}=\myrbrace 617\begingroup 618 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 619 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 620 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 621 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 622 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 623 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 624 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 625 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 626 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 627!endgroup 628 629% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 630\let\comma = , 631 632% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 633% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 634\let\, = \c 635\let\dotaccent = \. 636\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 637\let\tieaccent = \t 638\let\ubaraccent = \b 639\let\udotaccent = \d 640 641% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 642% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 643\def\questiondown{?`} 644\def\exclamdown{!`} 645\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 646\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 647 648% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 649\def\imacro{i} 650\def\jmacro{j} 651\def\dotless#1{% 652 \def\temp{#1}% 653 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 654 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 655 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 656 \fi\fi 657} 658 659% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 660% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 661% 662\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 663 664% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 665% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 666% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 667% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 668% \scriptscriptstyle). 669% 670\def\LaTeX{% 671 L\kern-.36em 672 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 673 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 674 \kern-.15em 675 \TeX 676} 677 678% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 679% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 680% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 681% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 682% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 683{\catcode`@ = 11 684 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 685 % if the definition is written into an index file. 686 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 687 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 688} 689 690% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 691\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 692 693% @* forces a line break. 694\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 695 696% @/ allows a line break. 697\let\/=\allowbreak 698 699% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 700\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 701 702% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 703\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 704 705% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 706\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 707 708% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 709% 710\def\onword{on} 711\def\offword{off} 712% 713\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 714 \def\temp{#1}% 715 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 716 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 717 \else 718 \errhelp = \EMsimple 719 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% 720 \fi\fi 721} 722 723% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 724% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 725% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 726\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 727 728% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 729% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 730% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 731% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 732% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 733% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 734% the text is small, which looks bad. 735% 736% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 737% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 738% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 739% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 740% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 741% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 742% 743\newbox\groupbox 744\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 745% 746\envdef\group{% 747 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 748 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 749 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 750 \fi 751 \startsavinginserts 752 % 753 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 754 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 755 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 756 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 757 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 758 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 759 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 760 \comment 761} 762% 763% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 764% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 765% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 766% above. But it's pretty close. 767\def\Egroup{% 768 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 769 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 770 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 771 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 772 \egroup % End the \vtop. 773 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 774 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 775 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 776 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 777 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 778 % group, force a page break. 779 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 780 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 781 \page 782 \fi 783 \fi 784 \box\groupbox 785 \prevdepth = \dimen1 786 \checkinserts 787} 788% 789% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 790% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 791% 792\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 793group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 794where each line of input produces a line of output.} 795 796% @need space-in-mils 797% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 798 799\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 800 801% Old definition--didn't work. 802%\parseargdef\need{\par % 803%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 804%% if the depth of the box does not fit. 805%{\baselineskip=0pt% 806%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 807%\prevdepth=-1000pt 808%}} 809 810\parseargdef\need{% 811 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 812 % paragraph. 813 \par 814 % 815 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 816 \dimen0 = #1\mil 817 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 818 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 819 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 820 % 821 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 822 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 823 % And a page break here is fine. 824 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 825 % 826 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 827 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 828 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 829 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 830 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 831 % 832 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 833 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 834 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 835 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 836 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 837 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 838 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 839 \penalty9999 840 % 841 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 842 \kern -#1\mil 843 % 844 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 845 \nobreak 846 \fi 847} 848 849% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 850 851\let\br = \par 852 853% @page forces the start of a new page. 854% 855\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 856 857% @exdent text.... 858% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 859 860% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 861% That's how much \exdent should take out. 862\newskip\exdentamount 863 864% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 865\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 866 867% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 868\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 869 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 870 871% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 872% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 873% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 874% 875\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 876\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 877% 878\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 879 \nobreak 880 \kern-\strutdepth 881 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 882 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 883 \vss 884 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 885 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 886 \ifx#1l% 887 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 888 \else 889 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 890 \fi 891 \null 892 }% 893}} 894\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 895\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 896% 897% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 898% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 899% else use TEXT for both). 900% 901\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 902\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 903 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 904 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 905 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 906 \def\righttext{#2}% 907 \else 908 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 909 \def\righttext{#1}% 910 \fi 911 % 912 \ifodd\pageno 913 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 914 \else 915 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 916 \fi 917 \temp 918} 919 920% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 921% 922\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 923\def\includezzz#1{% 924 \pushthisfilestack 925 \def\thisfile{#1}% 926 {% 927 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 928 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 929 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 930 % 931 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 932 % definitions, etc. 933 \expandafter 934 }\temp 935 \popthisfilestack 936} 937\def\filenamecatcodes{% 938 \catcode`\\=\other 939 \catcode`~=\other 940 \catcode`^=\other 941 \catcode`_=\other 942 \catcode`|=\other 943 \catcode`<=\other 944 \catcode`>=\other 945 \catcode`+=\other 946 \catcode`-=\other 947} 948 949\def\pushthisfilestack{% 950 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 951} 952\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 953 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 954} 955\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 956 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 957} 958 959\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 960\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 961 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 962 963\def\thisfile{} 964 965% @center line 966% outputs that line, centered. 967% 968\parseargdef\center{% 969 \ifhmode 970 \let\next\centerH 971 \else 972 \let\next\centerV 973 \fi 974 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 975} 976\def\centerH#1{% 977 {% 978 \hfil\break 979 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 980 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 981 \line{#1}% 982 \break 983 }% 984} 985\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 986 987% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 988 989\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 990 991% @comment ...line which is ignored... 992% @c is the same as @comment 993% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 994 995\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 996\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 997\commentxxx} 998{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 999 1000\let\c=\comment 1001 1002% @paragraphindent NCHARS 1003% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 1004% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 1005% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 1006% 1007\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 1008\def\noneword{none} 1009% 1010\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 1011 \def\temp{#1}% 1012 \ifx\temp\asisword 1013 \else 1014 \ifx\temp\noneword 1015 \defaultparindent = 0pt 1016 \else 1017 \defaultparindent = #1em 1018 \fi 1019 \fi 1020 \parindent = \defaultparindent 1021} 1022 1023% @exampleindent NCHARS 1024% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 1025% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 1026% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 1027\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 1028 \def\temp{#1}% 1029 \ifx\temp\asisword 1030 \else 1031 \ifx\temp\noneword 1032 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 1033 \else 1034 \lispnarrowing = #1em 1035 \fi 1036 \fi 1037} 1038 1039% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1040% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1041% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1042% paragraphs. 1043% 1044% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1045% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1046% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1047% By default, we suppress indentation. 1048% 1049\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1050\def\insertword{insert} 1051% 1052\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1053 \def\temp{#1}% 1054 \ifx\temp\noneword 1055 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1056 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1057 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1058 \else 1059 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1060 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1061 \fi\fi 1062} 1063 1064% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1065% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1066% 1067% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1068% paragraph. 1069% 1070\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1071 \gdef\indent{% 1072 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1073 \indent 1074 }% 1075 \gdef\noindent{% 1076 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1077 \noindent 1078 }% 1079 \global\everypar = {% 1080 \kern -\parindent 1081 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1082 }% 1083} 1084 1085\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1086 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1087 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1088 \global \everypar = {}% 1089} 1090 1091 1092% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1093% 1094\def\asis#1{#1} 1095 1096% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1097% 1098% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1099% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1100% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1101% which is what @var uses. 1102{ 1103 \catcode`\_ = \active 1104 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1105 \catcode`\_=\active 1106 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1107 } 1108} 1109% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1110% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1111% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1112% otherwise define @\. 1113% 1114% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1115\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1116% 1117\def\math{% 1118 \tex 1119 \mathunderscore 1120 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1121 \mathactive 1122 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 1123 \let\"=\ddot 1124 \let\'=\acute 1125 \let\==\bar 1126 \let\^=\hat 1127 \let\`=\grave 1128 \let\u=\breve 1129 \let\v=\check 1130 \let\~=\tilde 1131 \let\dotaccent=\dot 1132 $\finishmath 1133} 1134\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1135 1136% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1137% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1138% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1139% 1140{ 1141 \catcode`^ = \active 1142 \catcode`< = \active 1143 \catcode`> = \active 1144 \catcode`+ = \active 1145 \gdef\mathactive{% 1146 \let^ = \ptexhat 1147 \let< = \ptexless 1148 \let> = \ptexgtr 1149 \let+ = \ptexplus 1150 } 1151} 1152 1153% Some math mode symbols. 1154\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1155\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} 1156\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} 1157\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} 1158 1159% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1160% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 1161% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 1162% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 1163% whichever is larger. 1164% 1165\def\dots{% 1166 \leavevmode 1167 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 1168 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 1169 \dimen0 = \wd0 1170 \else 1171 \dimen0 = 1.5em 1172 \fi 1173 \hbox to \dimen0{% 1174 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 1175 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1176 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1177 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 1178 }% 1179} 1180 1181% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1182% 1183\def\enddots{% 1184 \dots 1185 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 1186} 1187 1188% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1189% Texinfo's parsing. 1190% 1191\let\comma = , 1192 1193% @refill is a no-op. 1194\let\refill=\relax 1195 1196% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1197% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1198% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1199% 1200\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1201\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1202 1203% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1204% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1205% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1206\def\setfilename{% 1207 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1208 \iflinks 1209 \tryauxfile 1210 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1211 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1212 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1213 \openindices 1214 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1215 % 1216 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1217 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1218 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1219 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1220 \closein 1 1221 % 1222 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1223} 1224 1225% Called from \setfilename. 1226% 1227\def\openindices{% 1228 \newindex{cp}% 1229 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1230 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1231 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1232 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1233 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1234} 1235 1236% @bye. 1237\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1238 1239 1240\message{pdf,} 1241% adobe `portable' document format 1242\newcount\tempnum 1243\newcount\lnkcount 1244\newtoks\filename 1245\newcount\filenamelength 1246\newcount\pgn 1247\newtoks\toksA 1248\newtoks\toksB 1249\newtoks\toksC 1250\newtoks\toksD 1251\newbox\boxA 1252\newcount\countA 1253\newif\ifpdf 1254\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1255 1256% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1257% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1258% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1259\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1260\else 1261 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1262 \else 1263 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1264 \else 1265 \pdftrue 1266 \fi 1267 \fi 1268\fi 1269 1270% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1271% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1272% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1273% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1274% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html 1275% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX 1276% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1277% that's what we do). 1278 1279% double active backslashes. 1280% 1281{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 1282 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% 1283 @catcode`@\=@active 1284 @let\=@doublebackslash} 1285} 1286 1287% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are 1288% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as 1289% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor 1290% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission 1291% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. 1292% 1293% #1 is the tokens to replace. 1294% #2 is the replacement. 1295% #3 is the control sequence with the string. 1296% 1297\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% 1298 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% 1299 ##1% 1300 \ifx\\##2\\% 1301 \else 1302 #2% 1303 \HyReturnAfterFi{% 1304 \HyPsdReplace##2\END 1305 }% 1306 \fi 1307 }% 1308 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% 1309} 1310\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} 1311 1312% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. 1313\def\backslashparens#1{% 1314 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply 1315 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. 1316 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% 1317 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% 1318} 1319 1320\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1321with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1322be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1323output) for that.)} 1324 1325\ifpdf 1326 % 1327 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. 1328 \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} 1329 \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} 1330 % 1331 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} 1332 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1333 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1334 \def\setcolor#1{% 1335 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1336 \domark 1337 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1338 } 1339 % 1340 \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} 1341 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1342 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1343 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1344 % 1345 \def\makefootline{% 1346 \baselineskip24pt 1347 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1348 } 1349 % 1350 \def\makeheadline{% 1351 \vbox to 0pt{% 1352 \vskip-22.5pt 1353 \line{% 1354 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1355 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1356 \getcolormarks 1357 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1358 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1359 }% 1360 \vss 1361 }% 1362 \nointerlineskip 1363 } 1364 % 1365 % 1366 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1367 % 1368 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1369 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1370 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1371 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1372 % 1373 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among 1374 % others). Let's try in that order. 1375 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1376 \begingroup 1377 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1378 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1379 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1380 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1381 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1382 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1383 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1384 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1385 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1386 \fi 1387 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1388 \fi 1389 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1390 \fi 1391 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1392 \fi 1393 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1394 \fi 1395 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1396 \fi 1397 \closein 1 1398 \endgroup 1399 % 1400 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1401 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1402 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1403 \immediate\pdfimage 1404 \else 1405 \immediate\pdfximage 1406 \fi 1407 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi 1408 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi 1409 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1410 #1.\pdfimgext 1411 \else 1412 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1413 \fi 1414 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1415 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1416 \fi} 1417 % 1418 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1419 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1420 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1421 \indexnofonts 1422 \turnoffactive 1423 \activebackslashdouble 1424 \makevalueexpandable 1425 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1426 \backslashparens\pdfdestname 1427 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1428 }} 1429 % 1430 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1431 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1432 % 1433 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1434 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1435 \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1436 \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1437 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1438 % 1439 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1440 % come from Petr Olsak 1441 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1442 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1443 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1444 \advance\tempnum by 1 1445 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1446 % 1447 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1448 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1449 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1450 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1451 % #4 is the page number 1452 % 1453 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1454 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1455 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1456 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1457 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1458 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1459 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1460 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1461 \else 1462 % Doubled backslashes in the name. 1463 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1464 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% 1465 \fi 1466 % 1467 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. 1468 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1469 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% 1470 % 1471 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1472 } 1473 % 1474 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1475 \begingroup 1476 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1477 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1478 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1479 % 1480 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1481 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1482 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1483 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1484 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1485 }% 1486 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1487 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1488 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1489 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1490 }% 1491 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1492 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1493 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1494 }% 1495 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1496 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1497 }% 1498 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1499 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1500 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1501 % 1502 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1503 % al. a second time, below. 1504 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1505 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1506 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1507 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1508 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1509 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1510 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1511 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1512 \readdatafile{toc}% 1513 % 1514 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1515 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1516 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1517 % 1518 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1519 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1520 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1521 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1522 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1523 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1524 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1525 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1526 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1527 % 1528 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1529 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1530 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1531 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1532 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1533 % 1534 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1535 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1536 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1537 \indexnofonts 1538 \setupdatafile 1539 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1540 \input \tocreadfilename 1541 \endgroup 1542 } 1543 % 1544 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1545 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1546 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1547 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1548 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1549 \fi 1550 \fi 1551 \nextsp} 1552 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1553 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1554 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1555 \else 1556 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1557 \fi 1558 % make a live url in pdf output. 1559 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1560 \begingroup 1561 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1562 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1563 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1564 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1565 % 1566 \normalturnoffactive 1567 \def\@{@}% 1568 \let\/=\empty 1569 \makevalueexpandable 1570 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1571 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1572 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1573 \endgroup} 1574 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1575 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1576 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1577 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1578 \def\maketoks{% 1579 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1580 \ifx\first0\adn0 1581 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1582 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1583 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1584 \else 1585 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1586 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1587 \let\next=\maketoks 1588 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1589 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1590 \fi 1591 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1592 \next} 1593 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1594 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1595 \def\pdflink#1{% 1596 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1597 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1598 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1599\else 1600 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1601 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1602 \let\endlink = \relax 1603 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1604 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1605 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1606\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1607 1608 1609\message{fonts,} 1610 1611% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1612% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1613% italics, not bold italics. 1614% 1615\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1616 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1617 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1618} 1619 1620% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1621% 1622\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1623 1624\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1625\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1626\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1627\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1628\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1629 1630% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1631% So we set up a \sf. 1632\newfam\sffam 1633\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1634\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1635 1636% We don't need math for this font style. 1637\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1638 1639 1640% Default leading. 1641\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1642 1643% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1644% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1645% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1646% 1647\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1648\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1649\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1650% 1651% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1652\def\baselinefactor{1} 1653% 1654\def\setleading#1{% 1655 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1656 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1657 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1658 \normalbaselines 1659 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1660 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1661 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1662 }% 1663} 1664 1665% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1666% 1667% do nothing with this by default. 1668\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1669\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1670\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1671 1672% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1673% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1674% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1675\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else 1676 \begingroup 1677 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1678 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1679%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1680%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1681%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1682%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1683%%Version: 1.000 1684%%EndComments 1685/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 168612 dict begin 1687begincmap 1688/CIDSystemInfo 1689<< /Registry (TeX) 1690/Ordering (OT1) 1691/Supplement 0 1692>> def 1693/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1694/CMapType 2 def 16951 begincodespacerange 1696<00> <7F> 1697endcodespacerange 16988 beginbfrange 1699<00> <01> <0393> 1700<09> <0A> <03A8> 1701<23> <26> <0023> 1702<28> <3B> <0028> 1703<3F> <5B> <003F> 1704<5D> <5E> <005D> 1705<61> <7A> <0061> 1706<7B> <7C> <2013> 1707endbfrange 170840 beginbfchar 1709<02> <0398> 1710<03> <039B> 1711<04> <039E> 1712<05> <03A0> 1713<06> <03A3> 1714<07> <03D2> 1715<08> <03A6> 1716<0B> <00660066> 1717<0C> <00660069> 1718<0D> <0066006C> 1719<0E> <006600660069> 1720<0F> <00660066006C> 1721<10> <0131> 1722<11> <0237> 1723<12> <0060> 1724<13> <00B4> 1725<14> <02C7> 1726<15> <02D8> 1727<16> <00AF> 1728<17> <02DA> 1729<18> <00B8> 1730<19> <00DF> 1731<1A> <00E6> 1732<1B> <0153> 1733<1C> <00F8> 1734<1D> <00C6> 1735<1E> <0152> 1736<1F> <00D8> 1737<21> <0021> 1738<22> <201D> 1739<27> <2019> 1740<3C> <00A1> 1741<3D> <003D> 1742<3E> <00BF> 1743<5C> <201C> 1744<5F> <02D9> 1745<60> <2018> 1746<7D> <02DD> 1747<7E> <007E> 1748<7F> <00A8> 1749endbfchar 1750endcmap 1751CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1752end 1753end 1754%%EndResource 1755%%EOF 1756 }\endgroup 1757 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1758 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1759 }% 1760% 1761% \cmapOT1IT 1762 \begingroup 1763 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1764 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1765%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1766%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1767%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1768%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1769%%Version: 1.000 1770%%EndComments 1771/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 177212 dict begin 1773begincmap 1774/CIDSystemInfo 1775<< /Registry (TeX) 1776/Ordering (OT1IT) 1777/Supplement 0 1778>> def 1779/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1780/CMapType 2 def 17811 begincodespacerange 1782<00> <7F> 1783endcodespacerange 17848 beginbfrange 1785<00> <01> <0393> 1786<09> <0A> <03A8> 1787<25> <26> <0025> 1788<28> <3B> <0028> 1789<3F> <5B> <003F> 1790<5D> <5E> <005D> 1791<61> <7A> <0061> 1792<7B> <7C> <2013> 1793endbfrange 179442 beginbfchar 1795<02> <0398> 1796<03> <039B> 1797<04> <039E> 1798<05> <03A0> 1799<06> <03A3> 1800<07> <03D2> 1801<08> <03A6> 1802<0B> <00660066> 1803<0C> <00660069> 1804<0D> <0066006C> 1805<0E> <006600660069> 1806<0F> <00660066006C> 1807<10> <0131> 1808<11> <0237> 1809<12> <0060> 1810<13> <00B4> 1811<14> <02C7> 1812<15> <02D8> 1813<16> <00AF> 1814<17> <02DA> 1815<18> <00B8> 1816<19> <00DF> 1817<1A> <00E6> 1818<1B> <0153> 1819<1C> <00F8> 1820<1D> <00C6> 1821<1E> <0152> 1822<1F> <00D8> 1823<21> <0021> 1824<22> <201D> 1825<23> <0023> 1826<24> <00A3> 1827<27> <2019> 1828<3C> <00A1> 1829<3D> <003D> 1830<3E> <00BF> 1831<5C> <201C> 1832<5F> <02D9> 1833<60> <2018> 1834<7D> <02DD> 1835<7E> <007E> 1836<7F> <00A8> 1837endbfchar 1838endcmap 1839CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1840end 1841end 1842%%EndResource 1843%%EOF 1844 }\endgroup 1845 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1846 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1847 }% 1848% 1849% \cmapOT1TT 1850 \begingroup 1851 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1852 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1853%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1854%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1855%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1856%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1857%%Version: 1.000 1858%%EndComments 1859/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 186012 dict begin 1861begincmap 1862/CIDSystemInfo 1863<< /Registry (TeX) 1864/Ordering (OT1TT) 1865/Supplement 0 1866>> def 1867/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1868/CMapType 2 def 18691 begincodespacerange 1870<00> <7F> 1871endcodespacerange 18725 beginbfrange 1873<00> <01> <0393> 1874<09> <0A> <03A8> 1875<21> <26> <0021> 1876<28> <5F> <0028> 1877<61> <7E> <0061> 1878endbfrange 187932 beginbfchar 1880<02> <0398> 1881<03> <039B> 1882<04> <039E> 1883<05> <03A0> 1884<06> <03A3> 1885<07> <03D2> 1886<08> <03A6> 1887<0B> <2191> 1888<0C> <2193> 1889<0D> <0027> 1890<0E> <00A1> 1891<0F> <00BF> 1892<10> <0131> 1893<11> <0237> 1894<12> <0060> 1895<13> <00B4> 1896<14> <02C7> 1897<15> <02D8> 1898<16> <00AF> 1899<17> <02DA> 1900<18> <00B8> 1901<19> <00DF> 1902<1A> <00E6> 1903<1B> <0153> 1904<1C> <00F8> 1905<1D> <00C6> 1906<1E> <0152> 1907<1F> <00D8> 1908<20> <2423> 1909<27> <2019> 1910<60> <2018> 1911<7F> <00A8> 1912endbfchar 1913endcmap 1914CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1915end 1916end 1917%%EndResource 1918%%EOF 1919 }\endgroup 1920 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1921 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1922 }% 1923\fi\fi 1924 1925 1926% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1927% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1928% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1929% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass 1930% empty to omit). 1931\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1932 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1933 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1934} 1935% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1936\let\cmap\gobble 1937% emacs-page end of cmaps 1938 1939% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1940% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1941% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1942\ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1943\def\fontprefix{cm} 1944\fi 1945% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1946\def\rmshape{r} 1947\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1948\def\bfshape{b} 1949\def\bxshape{bx} 1950\def\ttshape{tt} 1951\def\ttbshape{tt} 1952\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1953\def\itshape{ti} 1954\def\itbshape{bxti} 1955\def\slshape{sl} 1956\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1957\def\sfshape{ss} 1958\def\sfbshape{ss} 1959\def\scshape{csc} 1960\def\scbshape{csc} 1961 1962% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in 1963% Texinfo. 1964% 1965\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1966% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1967\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1968\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1969\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1970\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1971\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1972\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1973\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1974\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1975\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1976\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1977\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1978\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1979\def\textecsize{1095} 1980 1981% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1982\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1983\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1984\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1985\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1986 1987% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1988\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1989\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1990\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1991\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1992\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1993\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1994\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1995\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1996\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1997\font\smalli=cmmi9 1998\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1999\def\smallecsize{0900} 2000 2001% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2002\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2003\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2004\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2005\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2006\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2007\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2008\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2009\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2010\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2011\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2012\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2013\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2014 2015% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2016\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2017\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2018\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2019\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2020\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2021\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2022\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2023\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2024\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2025\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2026\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2027\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2028\def\authortt{\sectt} 2029\def\titleecsize{2074} 2030 2031% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2032\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2033\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2034\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2035\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2036\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2037\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2038\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2039\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2040\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2041\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2042\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2043\def\chapecsize{1728} 2044 2045% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2046\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2047\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2048\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2049\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2050\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2051\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2052\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2053\let\secbf\secrm 2054\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2055\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2056\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2057\def\sececsize{1440} 2058 2059% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2060\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2061\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2062\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2063\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2064\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2065\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2066\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2067\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2068\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2069\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2070\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2071\def\ssececsize{1200} 2072 2073% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 2074\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2075\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2076\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2077\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2078\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2079\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2080\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2081\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2082\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2083\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2084\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2085\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2086 2087% reset the current fonts 2088\textfonts 2089\rm 2090} % end of 11pt text font size definitions 2091 2092 2093% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2094% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2095% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2096% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2097% 2098\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2099% Text fonts (10pt). 2100\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2101\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2102\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2103\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2104\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2105\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2106\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2107\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2108\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2109\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2110\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2111\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2112\def\textecsize{1000} 2113 2114% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2115\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2116\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2117\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2118\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2119 2120% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2121\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2122\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2123\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2124\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2125\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2126\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2127\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2128\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2129\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2130\font\smalli=cmmi9 2131\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2132\def\smallecsize{0900} 2133 2134% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2135\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2136\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2137\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2138\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2139\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2140\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2141\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2142\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2143\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2144\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2145\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2146\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2147 2148% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2149\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2150\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2151\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2152\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2153\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2154\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2155\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2156\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2157\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2158\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2159\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2160\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2161\def\authortt{\sectt} 2162\def\titleecsize{2074} 2163 2164% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2165\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2166\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2167\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2168\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2169\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2170\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2171\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2172\let\chapbf\chaprm 2173\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2174\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2175\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2176\def\chapecsize{1440} 2177 2178% Section fonts (12pt). 2179\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2180\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2181\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2182\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2183\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2184\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2185\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2186\let\secbf\secrm 2187\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2188\font\seci=cmmi12 2189\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2190\def\sececsize{1200} 2191 2192% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2193\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2194\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2195\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2196\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2197\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2198\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2199\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2200\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2201\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2202\font\sseci=cmmi10 2203\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2204\def\ssececsize{1000} 2205 2206% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2207\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2208\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2209\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2210\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2211\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2212\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2213\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2214\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2215\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2216\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2217\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2218\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2219 2220% reduce space between paragraphs 2221\divide\parskip by 2 2222 2223% reset the current fonts 2224\textfonts 2225\rm 2226} % end of 10pt text font size definitions 2227 2228 2229% We provide the user-level command 2230% @fonttextsize 10 2231% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2232% 2233\def\xword{10} 2234\def\xiword{11} 2235% 2236\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2237 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2238 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2239 % 2240 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2241 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2242 % 2243 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2244 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2245 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2246 \else 2247 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2248 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2249 \fi\fi 2250 \endgroup 2251} 2252 2253 2254% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2255% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2256% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2257% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2258% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2259% 2260\def\resetmathfonts{% 2261 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2262 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2263 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2264} 2265 2266% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2267% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2268% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2269% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2270% 2271% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2272% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2273% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2274% 2275% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2276% 2277\def\textfonts{% 2278 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2279 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2280 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2281 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2282 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2283 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2284 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2285\def\titlefonts{% 2286 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2287 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2288 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2289 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2290 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2291 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2292 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 2293\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2294\def\chapfonts{% 2295 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2296 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2297 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2298 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2299 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2300 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2301 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2302\def\secfonts{% 2303 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2304 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2305 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2306 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2307 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2308 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2309 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2310\def\subsecfonts{% 2311 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2312 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2313 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2314 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2315 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2316 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2317 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2318\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2319\def\reducedfonts{% 2320 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2321 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2322 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2323 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2324 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2325 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2326 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2327\def\smallfonts{% 2328 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2329 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2330 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2331 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2332 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2333 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2334 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2335\def\smallerfonts{% 2336 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2337 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2338 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2339 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2340 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2341 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2342 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2343 2344% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2345\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2346 2347% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2348% can fit this many characters: 2349% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2350% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2351% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2352% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2353% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2354% 2355% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2356% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2357% 2358% I wish the USA used A4 paper. 2359% --karl, 24jan03. 2360 2361 2362% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2363% 2364\definetextfontsizexi 2365 2366% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2367\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2368\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2369 2370% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2371\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2372 2373% Fonts for short table of contents. 2374\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2375\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2376\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2377\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2378 2379%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 2380%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 2381 2382% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 2383% unless the following character is such as not to need one. 2384\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 2385 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 2386\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2387\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2388 2389% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 2390% @var is set to this for defun arguments. 2391\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2392 2393% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2394% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2395\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2396 2397\let\i=\smartitalic 2398\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2399\let\var=\smartslanted 2400\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2401\let\emph=\smartitalic 2402 2403% @b, explicit bold. 2404\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2405\let\strong=\b 2406 2407% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2408\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2409 2410% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2411% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2412% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2413% 2414\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2415\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2416 2417% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2418% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2419% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2420% 2421\catcode`@=11 2422 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2423 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2424 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2425 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2426 } 2427 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2428 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2429 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2430 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2431 } 2432\catcode`@=\other 2433\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2434 2435\def\t#1{% 2436 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2437 \null 2438} 2439\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} 2440\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2441\font\keysy=cmsy9 2442\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2443 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2444 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2445 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2446 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2447 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2448\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2449% The old definition, with no lozenge: 2450%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2451\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2452 2453% @file, @option are the same as @samp. 2454\let\file=\samp 2455\let\option=\samp 2456 2457% @code is a modification of @t, 2458% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 2459\def\tclose#1{% 2460 {% 2461 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2462 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2463 % 2464 % Switch to typewriter. 2465 \tt 2466 % 2467 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2468 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2469 % 2470 % Turn off hyphenation. 2471 \nohyphenation 2472 % 2473 \rawbackslash 2474 \plainfrenchspacing 2475 #1% 2476 }% 2477 \null 2478} 2479 2480% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2481% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2482% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2483 2484% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2485% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2486% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2487% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2488% -- rms. 2489{ 2490 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2491 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2492 % 2493 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2494 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active 2495 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft 2496 % 2497 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2498 \ifallowcodebreaks 2499 \let-\codedash 2500 \let_\codeunder 2501 \else 2502 \let-\realdash 2503 \let_\realunder 2504 \fi 2505 \codex 2506 } 2507} 2508 2509\def\realdash{-} 2510\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2511\def\codeunder{% 2512 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2513 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2514 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2515 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2516 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2517 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2518 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2519 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2520 {\_}% 2521} 2522\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2523 2524% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2525% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2526% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2527% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2528% 2529\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2530 2531\def\keywordtrue{true} 2532\def\keywordfalse{false} 2533 2534\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2535 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2536 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2537 \allowcodebreakstrue 2538 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2539 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2540 \else 2541 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2542 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% 2543 \fi\fi 2544} 2545 2546% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2547% then @kbd has no effect. 2548 2549% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2550% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2551% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2552\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2553 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2554 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2555 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2556 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2557 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2558 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2559 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2560 \else 2561 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2562 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% 2563 \fi\fi\fi 2564} 2565\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2566\def\wordexample{example} 2567\def\wordcode{code} 2568 2569% Default is `distinct.' 2570\kbdinputstyle distinct 2571 2572\def\xkey{\key} 2573\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2574\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2575\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi 2576\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} 2577 2578% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 2579\let\indicateurl=\code 2580\let\env=\code 2581\let\command=\code 2582 2583% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2584\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2585 2586% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2587\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2588\def\click{\arrow} 2589 2590% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2591% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2592% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2593% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 2594% a hypertex \special here. 2595% 2596\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 2597\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2598 \unsepspaces 2599 \pdfurl{#1}% 2600 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2601 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2602 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2603 \else 2604 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2605 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2606 \ifpdf 2607 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2608 \else 2609 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2610 \fi 2611 \else 2612 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2613 \fi 2614 \fi 2615 \endlink 2616\endgroup} 2617 2618% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2619% 2620\let\url=\uref 2621 2622% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2623% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2624% 2625%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2626\ifpdf 2627 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2628 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2629 \unsepspaces 2630 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2631 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2632 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2633 \endlink 2634 \endgroup} 2635\else 2636 \let\email=\uref 2637\fi 2638 2639% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2640% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2641% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2642% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2643% 2644\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2645 2646% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2647% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2648% 2649\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2650 2651\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} 2652 2653% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2654% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2655% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2656%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2657 2658% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2659\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2660\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2661\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2662 2663% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2664% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2665% all-uppercase. 2666% 2667\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2668\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2669 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2670 \def\temp{#2}% 2671 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2672 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2673 \fi 2674} 2675 2676% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2677% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2678% 2679\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2680\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2681 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2682 \def\temp{#2}% 2683 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2684 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2685 \fi 2686} 2687 2688% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 2689% 2690\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 2691 2692% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 2693% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 2694% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 2695% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 2696% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 2697% 2698% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 2699% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 2700% font height. 2701% 2702% feymr - regular 2703% feymo - slanted 2704% feybr - bold 2705% feybo - bold slanted 2706% 2707% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 2708% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 2709% Hmm. 2710% 2711% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 2712% Hope not. 2713% 2714% 2715\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2716\def\eurofont{% 2717 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2718 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2719 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 2720 % font installed. 2721 % 2722 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2723 % that to the current nominal size. 2724 % 2725 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2726 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2727 % 2728 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2729 % 2730 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2731 % bold: 2732 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2733 \else 2734 % regular: 2735 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2736 \fi 2737 \thiseurofont 2738} 2739 2740% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't 2741% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original 2742% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. 2743\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 2744\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 2745\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 2746\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 2747\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 2748\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 2749\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 2750\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 2751% 2752\def\ecfont{% 2753 % We can't distinguish serif/sanserif and italic/slanted, but this 2754 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 2755 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 2756 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 2757 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 2758 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2759 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2760 % bold: 2761 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2762 \else 2763 % regular: 2764 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2765 \fi 2766 \thisecfont 2767} 2768 2769% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2770% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2771% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2772% 2773\def\registeredsymbol{% 2774 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2775 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2776 }$% 2777} 2778 2779% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 2780% 2781\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 2782 2783% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2784% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2785% so we'll define it if necessary. 2786% 2787\ifx\Orb\undefined 2788\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2789\fi 2790 2791% Quotes. 2792\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 2793\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 2794\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 2795\chardef\quoteright=`\' 2796 2797 2798\message{page headings,} 2799 2800\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 2801\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 2802 2803% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 2804\newif\ifseenauthor 2805\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 2806 2807% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 2808% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 2809% 2810\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2811 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2812\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2813 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2814 2815\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 2816 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 2817 2818\envdef\titlepage{% 2819 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 2820 \begingroup 2821 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 2822 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 2823 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 2824 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 2825 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2826 % 2827 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 2828 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 2829 \let\oldpage = \page 2830 \def\page{% 2831 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2832 \finishtitlepage 2833 \fi 2834 \let\page = \oldpage 2835 \page 2836 \null 2837 }% 2838} 2839 2840\def\Etitlepage{% 2841 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2842 \finishtitlepage 2843 \fi 2844 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 2845 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 2846 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 2847 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 2848 \oldpage 2849 \endgroup 2850 % 2851 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 2852 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 2853 \HEADINGSon 2854 % 2855 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 2856 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2857 \shortcontents 2858 \contents 2859 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2860 \global\let\contents = \relax 2861 \fi 2862 % 2863 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2864 \contents 2865 \global\let\contents = \relax 2866 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2867 \fi 2868} 2869 2870\def\finishtitlepage{% 2871 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 2872 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 2873 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2874} 2875 2876%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 2877 2878\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 2879\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 2880 2881\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines 2882 \let\tt=\authortt} 2883 2884\parseargdef\title{% 2885 \checkenv\titlepage 2886 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} 2887 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 2888 \finishedtitlepagefalse 2889 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 2890} 2891 2892\parseargdef\subtitle{% 2893 \checkenv\titlepage 2894 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 2895} 2896 2897% @author should come last, but may come many times. 2898% It can also be used inside @quotation. 2899% 2900\parseargdef\author{% 2901 \def\temp{\quotation}% 2902 \ifx\thisenv\temp 2903 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 2904 \else 2905 \checkenv\titlepage 2906 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 2907 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% 2908 \fi 2909} 2910 2911 2912%%% Set up page headings and footings. 2913 2914\let\thispage=\folio 2915 2916\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 2917\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 2918\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 2919\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 2920 2921% Now make TeX use those variables 2922\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 2923 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 2924\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 2925 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 2926\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 2927 2928% Commands to set those variables. 2929% For example, this is what @headings on does 2930% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 2931% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 2932% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 2933% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 2934 2935 2936\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 2937\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2938\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2939\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2940 2941\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 2942\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2943\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2944\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2945 2946\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 2947 2948\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 2949\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2950\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2951\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2952 2953\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 2954\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2955\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2956 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 2957 % 2958 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 2959 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 2960 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 2961 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 2962} 2963 2964\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 2965 2966% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 2967% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 2968% 2969% The same set of arguments for: 2970% 2971% @oddheadingmarks 2972% @evenfootingmarks 2973% @oddfootingmarks 2974% @everyheadingmarks 2975% @everyfootingmarks 2976 2977\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 2978\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 2979\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 2980\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 2981\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 2982 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 2983\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 2984 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 2985% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 2986\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 2987 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 2988 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 2989} 2990 2991\everyheadingmarks bottom 2992\everyfootingmarks bottom 2993 2994% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 2995% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 2996% @headings off turns them off. 2997% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 2998% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2999% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3000% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3001% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3002% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3003 3004\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3005 3006\def\HEADINGSoff{% 3007\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3008\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 3009\HEADINGSoff 3010% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3011% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3012% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3013% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3014% edge of all pages. 3015\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3016\global\pageno=1 3017\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3018\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3019\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3020\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3021\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3022} 3023\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3024 3025% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3026% page number on top right. 3027\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3028\global\pageno=1 3029\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3030\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3031\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3032\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3033\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3034} 3035\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3036 3037\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3038\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3039\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3040\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3041\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3042\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3043\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3044\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3045} 3046 3047\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3048\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3049\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3050\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3051\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3052\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3053\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3054} 3055 3056% Subroutines used in generating headings 3057% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3058% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3059% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3060\ifx\today\undefined 3061\def\today{% 3062 \number\day\space 3063 \ifcase\month 3064 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3065 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3066 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3067 \fi 3068 \space\number\year} 3069\fi 3070 3071% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3072% It generates no output of its own. 3073\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3074\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3075 3076 3077\message{tables,} 3078% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3079 3080% default indentation of table text 3081\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3082% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3083\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3084% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3085\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3086 3087% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3088\newdimen\itemmax 3089 3090% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3091% these defs. 3092% They also define \itemindex 3093% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3094 3095\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3096 3097\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3098 3099\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3100\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3101 3102\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3103 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3104 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3105 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3106 \itemindex{#1}% 3107 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3108 % 3109 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3110 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3111 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3112 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3113 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3114 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3115 % 3116 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3117 % but leave it ragged-right. 3118 \begingroup 3119 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3120 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3121 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 3122 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3123 \endgroup 3124 % 3125 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3126 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3127 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3128 % 3129 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3130 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3131 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3132 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3133 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3134 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3135 % 3136 \penalty 10001 3137 \endgroup 3138 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3139 \else 3140 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3141 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3142 \noindent 3143 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3144 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3145 % eventually be printed. 3146 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3147 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3148 \unhbox0 3149 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3150 \endgroup 3151 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3152 \fi 3153} 3154 3155\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3156\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3157 3158% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3159\envdef\table{% 3160 \let\itemindex\gobble 3161 \tablecheck{table}% 3162} 3163\envdef\ftable{% 3164 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3165 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3166} 3167\envdef\vtable{% 3168 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3169 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3170} 3171\def\tablecheck#1{% 3172 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3173 \endgroup 3174 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3175 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3176 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3177 \else 3178 \let\next\tablex 3179 \fi 3180 \next 3181} 3182\def\tablex#1{% 3183 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3184 \parsearg\tabley 3185} 3186\def\tabley#1{% 3187 {% 3188 \makevalueexpandable 3189 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3190 \expandafter 3191 }\temp \endtablez 3192} 3193\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3194 \aboveenvbreak 3195 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3196 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3197 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3198 \itemmax=\tableindent 3199 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3200 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3201 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3202 \parindent = 0pt 3203 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3204 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3205 \let\item = \internalBitem 3206 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3207} 3208\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3209\let\Eftable\Etable 3210\let\Evtable\Etable 3211\let\Eitemize\Etable 3212\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3213 3214% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3215 3216\newcount \itemno 3217 3218\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3219 3220\def\doitemize#1{% 3221 \aboveenvbreak 3222 \itemmax=\itemindent 3223 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3224 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3225 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3226 \parindent=0pt 3227 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3228 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3229 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3230 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3231 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3232 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3233} 3234 3235% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3236% 3237\def\itemizeitem{% 3238 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3239 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3240 {% 3241 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3242 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3243 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3244 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3245 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3246 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3247 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3248 % that's the theory. 3249 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3250 \noindent 3251 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3252 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3253 \flushcr 3254} 3255 3256% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3257% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3258% 3259\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3260 3261% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3262% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3263% argument is the same as `1'. 3264% 3265\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3266\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3267 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3268 \def\thearg{#1}% 3269 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3270 % 3271 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3272 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3273 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3274 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3275 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3276 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3277 \ifx\rest\empty 3278 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3279 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3280 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3281 % not equal to itself. 3282 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3283 % 3284 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3285 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3286 % 3287 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3288 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3289 \else 3290 % It's a letter. 3291 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3292 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3293 \else 3294 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3295 \fi 3296 \fi 3297 \else 3298 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3299 \numericenumerate 3300 \fi 3301} 3302 3303% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3304% given in \thearg. 3305% 3306\def\numericenumerate{% 3307 \itemno = \thearg 3308 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3309} 3310 3311% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3312\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3313 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3314 \startenumeration{% 3315 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3316 \ifnum\itemno=0 3317 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3318 alphabet}% 3319 \fi 3320 \char\lccode\itemno 3321 }% 3322} 3323 3324% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3325\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3326 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3327 \startenumeration{% 3328 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3329 \ifnum\itemno=0 3330 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3331 alphabet} 3332 \fi 3333 \char\uccode\itemno 3334 }% 3335} 3336 3337% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3338% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3339% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3340% 3341\def\startenumeration#1{% 3342 \advance\itemno by -1 3343 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3344} 3345 3346% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3347% to @enumerate. 3348% 3349\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3350\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3351\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3352\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3353 3354 3355% @multitable macros 3356% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3357% 3358% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3359% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3360% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3361% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3362 3363% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3364 3365% To make preamble: 3366% 3367% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3368% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3369% @item ... 3370% 3371% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3372% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3373% columns as desired. 3374 3375 3376% Or use a template: 3377% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3378% @item ... 3379% using the widest term desired in each column. 3380 3381% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3382% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3383% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3384% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3385 3386% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3387% if they are. 3388 3389% Sample multitable: 3390 3391% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3392% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3393% @item 3394% first col stuff 3395% @tab 3396% second col stuff 3397% @tab 3398% third col 3399% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3400% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3401% 3402% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3403% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3404% @end multitable 3405 3406% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3407% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3408% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3409% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3410% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3411% to baseline. 3412% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3413% 3414\newskip\multitableparskip 3415\newskip\multitableparindent 3416\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3417\newskip\multitablelinespace 3418\multitableparskip=0pt 3419\multitableparindent=6pt 3420\multitablecolspace=12pt 3421\multitablelinespace=0pt 3422 3423% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3424% 3425\let\endsetuptable\relax 3426\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3427\let\columnfractions\relax 3428\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3429\newif\ifsetpercent 3430 3431% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3432% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3433% 3434\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3435 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3436 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3437 \setuptable 3438} 3439 3440\newcount\colcount 3441\def\setuptable#1{% 3442 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3443 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3444 \let\go = \relax 3445 \else 3446 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3447 \global\setpercenttrue 3448 \else 3449 \ifsetpercent 3450 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3451 \else 3452 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3453 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3454 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3455 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3456 \fi 3457 \fi 3458 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3459 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3460 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3461 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3462 \else 3463 \let\go = \setuptable 3464 \fi% 3465 \fi 3466 \go 3467} 3468 3469% multitable-only commands. 3470% 3471% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3472% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3473% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. 3474\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% 3475% 3476% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3477% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3478% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. 3479% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3480\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3481 3482% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3483% 3484\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3485% 3486\envdef\multitable{% 3487 \vskip\parskip 3488 \startsavinginserts 3489 % 3490 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3491 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3492 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3493 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3494 \def\item{\crcr}% 3495 % 3496 \tolerance=9500 3497 \hbadness=9500 3498 \setmultitablespacing 3499 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3500 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3501 \overfullrule=0pt 3502 \global\colcount=0 3503 % 3504 \everycr = {% 3505 \noalign{% 3506 \global\everytab={}% 3507 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3508 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3509 \checkinserts 3510 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3511 %\filbreak 3512 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3513 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3514 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3515 }% 3516 }% 3517 % 3518 \parsearg\domultitable 3519} 3520\def\domultitable#1{% 3521 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3522 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3523 % 3524 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3525 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3526 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3527 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3528 \halign\bgroup &% 3529 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3530 \multistrut 3531 \vtop{% 3532 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3533 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3534 % 3535 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3536 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3537 % the first one. 3538 % 3539 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3540 % to the width of each template entry. 3541 % 3542 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3543 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3544 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3545 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3546 % 3547 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3548 \rightskip=0pt 3549 \ifnum\colcount=1 3550 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3551 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3552 \else 3553 \ifsetpercent \else 3554 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3555 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3556 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3557 \fi 3558 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3559 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3560 \fi 3561 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3562 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3563 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3564 % For example: 3565 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3566 % @item @code{#} 3567 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3568 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3569 % marking characters. 3570 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3571 }\cr 3572} 3573\def\Emultitable{% 3574 \crcr 3575 \egroup % end the \halign 3576 \global\setpercentfalse 3577} 3578 3579\def\setmultitablespacing{% 3580 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 3581 % 3582 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 3583 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 3584 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 3585 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 3586\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 3587\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 3588\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 3589\fi 3590%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 3591%% table. If not, do nothing. 3592%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 3593\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 3594\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3595\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3596 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3597\fi% 3598\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 3599\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3600\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3601 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3602\fi} 3603 3604 3605\message{conditionals,} 3606 3607% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 3608% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 3609% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 3610% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 3611% attempt to close an environment group. 3612% 3613\def\makecond#1{% 3614 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 3615 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 3616} 3617\makecond{iftex} 3618\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 3619\makecond{ifnothtml} 3620\makecond{ifnotinfo} 3621\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 3622\makecond{ifnotxml} 3623 3624% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 3625% 3626\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 3627\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 3628\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 3629\def\html{\doignore{html}} 3630\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 3631\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 3632\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 3633\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 3634\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 3635\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 3636\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 3637\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 3638\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 3639 3640% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 3641% 3642% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 3643\newcount\doignorecount 3644 3645\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 3646 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 3647 \obeylines 3648 \catcode`\@ = \other 3649 \catcode`\{ = \other 3650 \catcode`\} = \other 3651 % 3652 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 3653 \spaceisspace 3654 % 3655 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 3656 \doignorecount = 0 3657 % 3658 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 3659 \dodoignore{#1}% 3660} 3661 3662{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 3663 \obeylines % 3664 % 3665 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 3666 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 3667 % 3668 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 3669 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 3670 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 3671 % 3672 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 3673 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 3674 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 3675 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 3676 % 3677 % And now expand that command. 3678 \doignoretext ^^M% 3679 }% 3680} 3681 3682\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 3683 \def\temp{#1}% 3684 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 3685 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 3686 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 3687 \advance\doignorecount by 1 3688 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 3689 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 3690 \fi 3691 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 3692} 3693 3694% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 3695% 3696\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 3697 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 3698 \let\next\enddoignore 3699 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 3700 \advance\doignorecount by -1 3701 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 3702 \fi 3703 \next 3704} 3705 3706% Finish off ignored text. 3707{ \obeylines% 3708 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 3709 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 3710 % would result in a blank line in the output. 3711 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 3712} 3713 3714 3715% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 3716% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 3717% 3718% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 3719% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 3720% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 3721% didn't need it. 3722% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 3723% 3724\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 3725\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 3726 {% 3727 \makevalueexpandable 3728 \def\temp{#2}% 3729 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 3730 \ifx\temp\empty 3731 \next{}% 3732 \else 3733 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 3734 \fi 3735 }% 3736} 3737% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 3738\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 3739 3740% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 3741% 3742\parseargdef\clear{% 3743 {% 3744 \makevalueexpandable 3745 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 3746 }% 3747} 3748 3749% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 3750\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 3751\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 3752{ 3753 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 3754 % 3755 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 3756 \let\value = \expandablevalue 3757 % We don't want these characters active, ... 3758 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 3759 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 3760 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 3761 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 3762 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 3763 } 3764} 3765 3766% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 3767% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 3768% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 3769% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 3770% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 3771% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 3772% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 3773% 3774\def\expandablevalue#1{% 3775 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 3776 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 3777 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 3778 \else 3779 \csname SET#1\endcsname 3780 \fi 3781} 3782 3783% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 3784% with @set. 3785% 3786% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 3787% 3788\makecond{ifset} 3789\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 3790\def\doifset#1#2{% 3791 {% 3792 \makevalueexpandable 3793 \let\next=\empty 3794 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 3795 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 3796 \fi 3797 \expandafter 3798 }\next 3799} 3800\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 3801 3802% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 3803% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 3804% 3805% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 3806% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 3807% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 3808% 3809\makecond{ifclear} 3810\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 3811\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 3812 3813% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 3814% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 3815\let\dircategory=\comment 3816 3817% @defininfoenclose. 3818\let\definfoenclose=\comment 3819 3820 3821\message{indexing,} 3822% Index generation facilities 3823 3824% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 3825% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 3826\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 3827 3828% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 3829% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 3830% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 3831% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 3832% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 3833% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 3834% for the sake of vms. 3835% 3836\def\newindex#1{% 3837 \iflinks 3838 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3839 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 3840 \fi 3841 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 3842 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 3843} 3844 3845% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 3846% 3847\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 3848 3849% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 3850% 3851\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 3852% 3853\def\newcodeindex#1{% 3854 \iflinks 3855 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3856 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 3857 \fi 3858 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 3859 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 3860} 3861 3862 3863% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 3864% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 3865% 3866% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 3867% inside @code. 3868% 3869\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 3870\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 3871 3872% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 3873% #3 the target index (bar). 3874\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 3875 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 3876 % closing the target index. 3877 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined 3878 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 3879 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 3880 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 3881 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 3882 \fi 3883 % redefine \fooindfile: 3884 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 3885 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 3886 % redefine \fooindex: 3887 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 3888} 3889 3890% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 3891% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 3892% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 3893 3894% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 3895% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 3896 3897% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 3898% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 3899 3900\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 3901\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 3902 3903% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 3904\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 3905\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 3906 3907% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 3908% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 3909% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 3910% 3911\def\indexdummies{% 3912 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 3913 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 3914 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 3915 % 3916 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 3917 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 3918 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 3919 \let\{ = \mylbrace 3920 \let\} = \myrbrace 3921 % 3922 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 3923 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 3924 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 3925 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 3926 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 3927 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 3928 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 3929 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 3930 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 3931 % 3932 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 3933 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 3934 % @macro funindex {WORD} 3935 % @findex xyz 3936 % @end macro 3937 % ... 3938 % @funindex commtest 3939 % 3940 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 3941 % 3942 % Sample whatsit resulting: 3943 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 3944 % 3945 % So: 3946 \let\endinput = \empty 3947 % 3948 % Do the redefinitions. 3949 \commondummies 3950} 3951 3952% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 3953% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 3954% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 3955% this will be simpler. 3956% 3957\def\atdummies{% 3958 \def\@{@@}% 3959 \def\ {@ }% 3960 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 3961 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 3962 % 3963 % Do the redefinitions. 3964 \commondummies 3965 \otherbackslash 3966} 3967 3968% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 3969% 3970\def\commondummies{% 3971 % 3972 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 3973 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, 3974 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 3975 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 3976 % from whatever follows. 3977 % 3978 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 3979 % space. 3980 % 3981 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 3982 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 3983 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 3984 % 3985 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 3986 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 3987 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3988 % 3989 \commondummiesnofonts 3990 % 3991 \definedummyletter\_% 3992 % 3993 % Non-English letters. 3994 \definedummyword\AA 3995 \definedummyword\AE 3996 \definedummyword\L 3997 \definedummyword\OE 3998 \definedummyword\O 3999 \definedummyword\aa 4000 \definedummyword\ae 4001 \definedummyword\l 4002 \definedummyword\oe 4003 \definedummyword\o 4004 \definedummyword\ss 4005 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4006 \definedummyword\questiondown 4007 \definedummyword\ordf 4008 \definedummyword\ordm 4009 % 4010 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4011 \definedummyword\bf 4012 \definedummyword\gtr 4013 \definedummyword\hat 4014 \definedummyword\less 4015 \definedummyword\sf 4016 \definedummyword\sl 4017 \definedummyword\tclose 4018 \definedummyword\tt 4019 % 4020 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4021 \definedummyword\TeX 4022 % 4023 % Assorted special characters. 4024 \definedummyword\bullet 4025 \definedummyword\comma 4026 \definedummyword\copyright 4027 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4028 \definedummyword\dots 4029 \definedummyword\enddots 4030 \definedummyword\equiv 4031 \definedummyword\error 4032 \definedummyword\euro 4033 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4034 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4035 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4036 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4037 \definedummyword\expansion 4038 \definedummyword\minus 4039 \definedummyword\pounds 4040 \definedummyword\point 4041 \definedummyword\print 4042 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4043 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4044 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4045 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4046 \definedummyword\quoteright 4047 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4048 \definedummyword\result 4049 \definedummyword\textdegree 4050 % 4051 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4052 \macrolist 4053 % 4054 \normalturnoffactive 4055 % 4056 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4057 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4058 \makevalueexpandable 4059} 4060 4061% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4062% 4063\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4064 % Control letters and accents. 4065 \definedummyletter\!% 4066 \definedummyaccent\"% 4067 \definedummyaccent\'% 4068 \definedummyletter\*% 4069 \definedummyaccent\,% 4070 \definedummyletter\.% 4071 \definedummyletter\/% 4072 \definedummyletter\:% 4073 \definedummyaccent\=% 4074 \definedummyletter\?% 4075 \definedummyaccent\^% 4076 \definedummyaccent\`% 4077 \definedummyaccent\~% 4078 \definedummyword\u 4079 \definedummyword\v 4080 \definedummyword\H 4081 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4082 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4083 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4084 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4085 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4086 \definedummyword\dotless 4087 % 4088 % Texinfo font commands. 4089 \definedummyword\b 4090 \definedummyword\i 4091 \definedummyword\r 4092 \definedummyword\sc 4093 \definedummyword\t 4094 % 4095 % Commands that take arguments. 4096 \definedummyword\acronym 4097 \definedummyword\cite 4098 \definedummyword\code 4099 \definedummyword\command 4100 \definedummyword\dfn 4101 \definedummyword\emph 4102 \definedummyword\env 4103 \definedummyword\file 4104 \definedummyword\kbd 4105 \definedummyword\key 4106 \definedummyword\math 4107 \definedummyword\option 4108 \definedummyword\pxref 4109 \definedummyword\ref 4110 \definedummyword\samp 4111 \definedummyword\strong 4112 \definedummyword\tie 4113 \definedummyword\uref 4114 \definedummyword\url 4115 \definedummyword\var 4116 \definedummyword\verb 4117 \definedummyword\w 4118 \definedummyword\xref 4119} 4120 4121% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4122% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4123% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4124% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4125% 4126\def\indexnofonts{% 4127 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4128 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4129 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4130 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4131 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 4132 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4133 % 4134 \commondummiesnofonts 4135 % 4136 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4137 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4138 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4139 %\let\tt=\asis 4140 % 4141 \def\ { }% 4142 \def\@{@}% 4143 % how to handle braces? 4144 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4145 % 4146 % Non-English letters. 4147 \def\AA{AA}% 4148 \def\AE{AE}% 4149 \def\L{L}% 4150 \def\OE{OE}% 4151 \def\O{O}% 4152 \def\aa{aa}% 4153 \def\ae{ae}% 4154 \def\l{l}% 4155 \def\oe{oe}% 4156 \def\o{o}% 4157 \def\ss{ss}% 4158 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4159 \def\questiondown{?}% 4160 \def\ordf{a}% 4161 \def\ordm{o}% 4162 % 4163 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4164 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4165 % 4166 % Assorted special characters. 4167 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4168 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4169 \def\comma{,}% 4170 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4171 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4172 \def\dots{...}% 4173 \def\enddots{...}% 4174 \def\equiv{==}% 4175 \def\error{error}% 4176 \def\euro{euro}% 4177 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4178 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4179 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4180 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4181 \def\expansion{==>}% 4182 \def\minus{-}% 4183 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4184 \def\point{.}% 4185 \def\print{-|}% 4186 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4187 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4188 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4189 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4190 \def\quoteright{'}% 4191 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4192 \def\result{=>}% 4193 \def\textdegree{degrees}% 4194 % 4195 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4196 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4197 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4198 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4199 % that starts with \. 4200 % 4201 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4202 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4203 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4204 % 4205 \macrolist 4206} 4207 4208\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4209\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4210 4211% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4212% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4213\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4214 4215% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4216% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4217% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4218% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4219% 4220\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4221 \iflinks 4222 {% 4223 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4224 \toks0 = {#2}% 4225 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4226 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4227 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4228 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4229 \fi 4230 % 4231 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4232 % 4233 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4234 }% 4235 \fi 4236} 4237 4238% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4239% 4240\def\dosubindwrite{% 4241 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4242 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4243 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4244 \fi 4245 % 4246 % Remember, we are within a group. 4247 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4248 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4249 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4250 % 4251 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4252 % get the string to sort by. 4253 {\indexnofonts 4254 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4255 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4256 }% 4257 % 4258 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4259 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4260 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4261 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4262 % sorted result. 4263 \edef\temp{% 4264 \write\writeto{% 4265 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4266 }% 4267 \temp 4268} 4269 4270% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4271% 4272% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4273% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4274% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4275% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4276% sequences like this: 4277% @end defun 4278% @tindex whatever 4279% @defun ... 4280% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4281% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4282% the previous defun. 4283% 4284% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4285% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4286% 4287% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4288% 4289% But wait, there is a catch there: 4290% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4291% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4292% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4293% representation of the skip. 4294% 4295% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4296% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4297% 4298\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4299% 4300\newskip\whatsitskip 4301\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4302% 4303% ..., ready, GO: 4304% 4305\def\safewhatsit#1{% 4306\ifhmode 4307 #1% 4308\else 4309 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4310 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4311 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4312 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4313 % 4314 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4315 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4316 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4317 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4318 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4319 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4320 \else 4321 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4322 \fi 4323 % 4324 #1% 4325 % 4326 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4327 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4328 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4329 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4330 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4331 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4332 % 4333 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4334 % @vindex index-whatever 4335 % Description. 4336 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4337 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4338 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4339 \else 4340 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4341 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4342 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4343 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4344 \fi 4345\fi 4346} 4347 4348% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4349% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4350% or 4351% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4352% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4353% containing these kinds of lines: 4354% \initial {c} 4355% before the first topic whose initial is c 4356% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4357% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4358% \primary {topic} 4359% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4360% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4361% for each subtopic. 4362 4363% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4364% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4365 4366\def\findex {\fnindex} 4367\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4368\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4369\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4370\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4371\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4372 4373\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4374{\obeylines % 4375\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4376\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4377 4378% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4379 4380% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4381% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4382% 4383\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4384 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4385 % 4386 \smallfonts \rm 4387 \tolerance = 9500 4388 \plainfrenchspacing 4389 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4390 % 4391 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4392 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4393 % \initial {@} 4394 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4395 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4396 \catcode`\@ = 11 4397 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4398 \ifeof 1 4399 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4400 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4401 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4402 % there is some text. 4403 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4404 \else 4405 % 4406 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4407 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4408 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4409 \read 1 to \temp 4410 \ifeof 1 4411 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4412 \else 4413 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4414 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4415 % to make right now. 4416 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4417 \catcode`\\ = 0 4418 \escapechar = `\\ 4419 \begindoublecolumns 4420 \input \jobname.#1s 4421 \enddoublecolumns 4422 \fi 4423 \fi 4424 \closein 1 4425\endgroup} 4426 4427% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4428% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4429 4430\def\initial#1{{% 4431 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4432 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4433 % 4434 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4435 \removelastskip 4436 % 4437 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4438 \nobreak 4439 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4440 \penalty 0 4441 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4442 % 4443 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4444 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4445 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4446 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4447 % 4448 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4449 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4450 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4451 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4452 \nobreak 4453 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4454}} 4455 4456% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4457% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4458% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4459% 4460% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4461% \def\entry#1#2{... 4462% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4463% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4464% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4465% 4466% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4467% --kasal, 21nov03 4468\def\entry{% 4469 \begingroup 4470 % 4471 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4472 % affect previous text. 4473 \par 4474 % 4475 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4476 \parfillskip = 0in 4477 % 4478 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4479 \parskip = 0in 4480 % 4481 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4482 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4483 % 4484 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4485 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4486 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4487 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4488 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4489 % 4490 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4491 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4492 \hangindent = 2em 4493 % 4494 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4495 % with blank space. 4496 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4497 % 4498 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 4499 % columns. 4500 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 4501 % 4502 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 4503 \afterassignment\doentry 4504 \let\temp = 4505} 4506\def\doentry{% 4507 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 4508 \noindent 4509 \aftergroup\finishentry 4510 % And now comes the text of the entry. 4511} 4512\def\finishentry#1{% 4513 % #1 is the page number. 4514 % 4515 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 4516 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 4517 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 4518 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 4519 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 4520 \ % 4521 \else 4522 % 4523 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 4524 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 4525 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 4526 \hfil\penalty50 4527 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 4528 % 4529 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 4530 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 4531 % \hbox ensues. 4532 \ifpdf 4533 \pdfgettoks#1.% 4534 \ \the\toksA 4535 \else 4536 \ #1% 4537 \fi 4538 \fi 4539 \par 4540 \endgroup 4541} 4542 4543% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 4544\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 4545 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 4546 4547\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 4548 4549\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 4550\def\secondary#1#2{{% 4551 \parfillskip=0in 4552 \parskip=0in 4553 \hangindent=1in 4554 \hangafter=1 4555 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 4556 \ifpdf 4557 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 4558 \else 4559 #2 4560 \fi 4561 \par 4562}} 4563 4564% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 4565% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 4566% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 4567\catcode`\@=11 4568 4569\newbox\partialpage 4570\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 4571 4572\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 4573 % Grab any single-column material above us. 4574 \output = {% 4575 % 4576 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 4577 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 4578 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 4579 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 4580 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 4581 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 4582 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 4583 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 4584 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 4585 \fi 4586 % 4587 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 4588 % Unvbox the main output page. 4589 \unvbox\PAGE 4590 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 4591 }% 4592 }% 4593 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 4594 % 4595 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 4596 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 4597 % 4598 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 4599 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 4600 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 4601 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 4602 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 4603 % 4604 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 4605 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 4606 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 4607 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 4608 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 4609 % 4610 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 4611 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 4612 % been clobbered. 4613 % 4614 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 4615 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 4616 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 4617 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4618 % 4619 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 4620 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 4621 \vsize = 2\vsize 4622} 4623 4624% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 4625% the last. 4626% 4627\def\doublecolumnout{% 4628 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 4629 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 4630 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 4631 % previous page. 4632 \dimen@ = \vsize 4633 \divide\dimen@ by 2 4634 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 4635 % 4636 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 4637 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 4638 \onepageout\pagesofar 4639 \unvbox255 4640 \penalty\outputpenalty 4641} 4642% 4643% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 4644% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 4645\def\pagesofar{% 4646 \unvbox\partialpage 4647 % 4648 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4649 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 4650 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 4651} 4652% 4653% All done with double columns. 4654\def\enddoublecolumns{% 4655 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 4656 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 4657 % following situation: 4658 % 4659 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 4660 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 4661 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 4662 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 4663 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 4664 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 4665 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 4666 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 4667 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 4668 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 4669 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 4670 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 4671 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 4672 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 4673 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 4674 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 4675 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 4676 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 4677 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 4678 % 4679 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 4680 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 4681 \penalty0 4682 % 4683 \output = {% 4684 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 4685 % current page, no automatic page break. 4686 \balancecolumns 4687 % 4688 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 4689 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 4690 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 4691 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 4692 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 4693 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 4694 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 4695 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 4696 }% 4697 \eject 4698 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 4699 % 4700 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 4701 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 4702 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 4703 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 4704 \pagegoal = \vsize 4705} 4706% 4707% Called at the end of the double column material. 4708\def\balancecolumns{% 4709 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 4710 \dimen@ = \ht0 4711 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 4712 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 4713 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 4714 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 4715 \splittopskip = \topskip 4716 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 4717 {% 4718 \vbadness = 10000 4719 \loop 4720 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 4721 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 4722 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 4723 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 4724 \repeat 4725 }% 4726 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 4727 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 4728 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 4729 % 4730 \pagesofar 4731} 4732\catcode`\@ = \other 4733 4734 4735\message{sectioning,} 4736% Chapters, sections, etc. 4737 4738% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 4739% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 4740% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 4741% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 4742% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 4743\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 4744\newcount\chapno 4745\newcount\secno \secno=0 4746\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 4747\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 4748 4749% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 4750\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 4751% 4752% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 4753% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 4754% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 4755% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 4756% 4757\def\appendixletter{% 4758 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 4759 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 4760 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 4761 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 4762 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 4763 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 4764 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 4765 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 4766 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 4767 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 4768 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 4769 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 4770 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 4771 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 4772 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 4773 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 4774 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 4775 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 4776 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 4777 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 4778 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 4779 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 4780 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 4781 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 4782 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 4783 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 4784 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 4785 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 4786 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 4787 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 4788 \else\char\the\appendixno 4789 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 4790 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 4791 4792% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 4793% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 4794% these. @section does likewise. 4795\def\thischapter{} 4796\def\thischapternum{} 4797\def\thischaptername{} 4798\def\thissection{} 4799\def\thissectionnum{} 4800\def\thissectionname{} 4801 4802\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 4803\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 4804 4805% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 4806\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 4807\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 4808 4809% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 4810\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 4811\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 4812 4813% we only have subsub. 4814\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 4815% 4816% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 4817% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 4818\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 4819% 4820% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 4821% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 4822\def\chapheadtype{N} 4823 4824% Choose a heading macro 4825% #1 is heading type 4826% #2 is heading level 4827% #3 is text for heading 4828\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 4829 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 4830 \absseclevel=#2 4831 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 4832 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 4833 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 4834 \absseclevel = 0 4835 \else 4836 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 4837 \absseclevel = 3 4838 \fi 4839 \fi 4840 % The heading type: 4841 \def\headtype{#1}% 4842 \if \headtype U% 4843 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 4844 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 4845 \fi 4846 \else 4847 % Check for appendix sections: 4848 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 4849 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 4850 \else 4851 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 4852 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 4853 \fi\fi 4854 \fi 4855 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 4856 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 4857 \def\headtype{U}% 4858 \else 4859 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 4860 \fi 4861 \fi 4862 % Now print the heading: 4863 \if \headtype U% 4864 \ifcase\absseclevel 4865 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 4866 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 4867 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4868 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4869 \fi 4870 \else 4871 \if \headtype A% 4872 \ifcase\absseclevel 4873 \appendixzzz{#3}% 4874 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 4875 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 4876 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4877 \fi 4878 \else 4879 \ifcase\absseclevel 4880 \chapterzzz{#3}% 4881 \or \seczzz{#3}% 4882 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4883 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4884 \fi 4885 \fi 4886 \fi 4887 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4888} 4889 4890% an interface: 4891\def\numhead{\genhead N} 4892\def\apphead{\genhead A} 4893\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 4894 4895% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 4896% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 4897% 4898% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 4899% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 4900\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4901% 4902\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 4903\def\chapterzzz#1{% 4904 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 4905 % as an @include file. 4906 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4907 \global\advance\chapno by 1 4908 % 4909 % Used for \float. 4910 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 4911 \resetallfloatnos 4912 % 4913 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% 4914 % 4915 % Write the actual heading. 4916 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 4917 % 4918 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 4919 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 4920 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4921 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4922} 4923 4924\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz 4925\def\appendixzzz#1{% 4926 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4927 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 4928 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 4929 \resetallfloatnos 4930 % 4931 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% 4932 \message{\appendixnum}% 4933 % 4934 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 4935 % 4936 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 4937 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 4938 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 4939} 4940 4941\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 4942\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 4943 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4944 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 4945 % 4946 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 4947 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4948 \resetallfloatnos 4949 % 4950 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 4951 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 4952 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 4953 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 4954 % to be executed, not expanded). 4955 % 4956 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 4957 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 4958 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 4959 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 4960 % the toc entries.) 4961 \toks0 = {#1}% 4962 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 4963 % 4964 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 4965 % 4966 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 4967 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 4968 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 4969} 4970 4971% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 4972\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 4973 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 4974 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 4975 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 4976 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 4977 \unnmhead0{#1}% 4978 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4979} 4980 4981% @top is like @unnumbered. 4982\let\top\unnumbered 4983 4984% Sections. 4985\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 4986\def\seczzz#1{% 4987 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4988 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 4989} 4990 4991\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 4992\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 4993 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4994 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 4995} 4996\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 4997 4998\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 4999\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 5000 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5001 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 5002} 5003 5004% Subsections. 5005\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 5006\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 5007 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5008 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5009} 5010 5011\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 5012\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 5013 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5014 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5015 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5016} 5017 5018\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 5019\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5020 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5021 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5022 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5023} 5024 5025% Subsubsections. 5026\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 5027\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5028 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5029 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5030 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5031} 5032 5033\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 5034\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5035 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5036 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5037 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5038} 5039 5040\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 5041\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5042 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5043 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5044 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5045} 5046 5047% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5048% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5049% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5050\let\section = \numberedsec 5051\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5052\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5053 5054% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5055 5056% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 5057% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 5058% overlong headings to fold. 5059% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 5060% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 5061% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 5062% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 5063 5064 5065\def\majorheading{% 5066 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5067 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5068} 5069 5070\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5071\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5072 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5073 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5074 \rm #1\hfill}}% 5075 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 5076 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5077} 5078 5079% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5080\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5081 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5082\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5083 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5084\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5085 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5086 5087% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5088% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5089% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5090 5091%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5092\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5093 5094%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 5095% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5096 5097\newskip\chapheadingskip 5098 5099\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5100\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5101% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5102% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5103% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5104\def\chapoddpage{% 5105 \chappager 5106 \ifodd\pageno \else 5107 \begingroup 5108 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 5109 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 5110 \hbox to 0pt{}% 5111 \chappager 5112 \endgroup 5113 \fi 5114} 5115 5116\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5117 5118\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5119\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5120\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5121\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5122 5123\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5124\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5125\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5126\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5127\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5128 5129\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5130\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5131\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5132\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5133\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5134 5135\CHAPPAGon 5136 5137% Chapter opening. 5138% 5139% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5140% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5141% 5142% To test against our argument. 5143\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5144\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5145\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5146% 5147\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5148 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5149 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5150 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5151 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5152 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5153 % 5154 \def\temptype{#2}% 5155 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5156 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5157 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5158 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5159 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5160 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5161 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5162 \toks0={#1}% 5163 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5164 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5165 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5166 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5167 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5168 }% 5169 \else 5170 \toks0={#1}% 5171 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5172 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5173 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5174 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5175 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5176 }% 5177 \fi\fi\fi 5178 % 5179 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5180 % the preceding space. 5181 \safewhatsit\domark 5182 % 5183 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5184 \pchapsepmacro 5185 % 5186 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5187 % between here and the heading. 5188 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5189 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5190 \domark 5191 % 5192 {% 5193 \chapfonts \rm 5194 % 5195 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5196 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5197 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5198 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5199 % 5200 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5201 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5202 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5203 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5204 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5205 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5206 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5207 \def\toctype{omit}% 5208 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5209 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5210 \def\toctype{app}% 5211 \else 5212 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5213 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5214 \fi\fi\fi 5215 % 5216 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5217 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5218 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5219 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5220 % 5221 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5222 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5223 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5224 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5225 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5226 \donoderef{#2}% 5227 % 5228 % Typeset the actual heading. 5229 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5230 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5231 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5232 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5233 }% 5234 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5235 \nobreak 5236} 5237 5238% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5239\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5240\def\centerparameters{% 5241 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5242 \leftskip = \rightskip 5243 \parfillskip = 0pt 5244} 5245 5246 5247% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5248% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5249% 5250\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5251% 5252\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5253\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5254 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5255 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5256} 5257\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5258\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5259\par\penalty 5000 % 5260} 5261\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5262\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5263 \parindent=0pt 5264 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5265} 5266\def\CHAPFopen{% 5267 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5268 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5269 5270 5271% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5272% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5273% 5274\newskip\secheadingskip 5275\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5276 5277% Subsection titles. 5278\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5279\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5280 5281% Subsubsection titles. 5282\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5283\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5284 5285 5286% Print any size, any type, section title. 5287% 5288% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5289% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5290% section number. 5291% 5292\def\seckeyword{sec} 5293% 5294\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5295 {% 5296 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5297 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 5298 % 5299 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5300 \def\temptype{#3}% 5301 % 5302 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5303 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5304 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5305 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5306 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5307 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5308 \fi 5309 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5310 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5311 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5312 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5313 \toks0={#1}% 5314 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5315 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5316 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5317 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5318 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5319 }% 5320 \fi 5321 \else 5322 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5323 \toks0={#1}% 5324 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5325 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5326 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5327 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5328 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5329 }% 5330 \fi 5331 \fi\fi\fi 5332 % 5333 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5334 % the preceding space. 5335 \safewhatsit\domark 5336 % 5337 % Insert space above the heading. 5338 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5339 % 5340 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5341 % between here and the heading. 5342 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5343 \domark 5344 % 5345 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5346 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5347 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5348 \def\toctype{unn}% 5349 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5350 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5351 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5352 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5353 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5354 \def\toctype{omit}% 5355 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5356 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5357 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5358 \def\toctype{app}% 5359 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5360 \else 5361 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5362 \def\toctype{num}% 5363 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5364 \fi\fi\fi 5365 % 5366 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5367 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5368 % 5369 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5370 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5371 \donoderef{#3}% 5372 % 5373 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5374 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5375 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5376 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5377 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5378 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5379 \nobreak 5380 % 5381 % Output the actual section heading. 5382 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5383 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5384 \unhbox0 #1}% 5385 }% 5386 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5387 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5388 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5389 % 5390 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5391 % was followed by glue. 5392 \nobreak 5393 % 5394 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5395 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5396 % discardable item.) 5397 \vskip-\parskip 5398 % 5399 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 5400 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 5401 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 5402 % 5403 % @section sec-whatever 5404 % @deffn def-whatever 5405 \penalty 10001 5406} 5407 5408 5409\message{toc,} 5410% Table of contents. 5411\newwrite\tocfile 5412 5413% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5414% Called from @chapter, etc. 5415% 5416% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5417% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5418% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5419% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5420% destination to jump to. 5421% 5422% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5423% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5424% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5425% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5426% 5427\newif\iftocfileopened 5428\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5429% 5430\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5431 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5432 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5433 \iftocfileopened\else 5434 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5435 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5436 \fi 5437 % 5438 \iflinks 5439 {\atdummies 5440 \edef\temp{% 5441 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5442 \temp 5443 }% 5444 \fi 5445 \fi 5446 % 5447 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5448 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5449 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5450 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5451 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5452 % `1', and two named `2'. 5453 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5454} 5455 5456 5457% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 5458% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 5459% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 5460% 5461\def\activecatcodes{% 5462 \catcode`\"=\active 5463 \catcode`\$=\active 5464 \catcode`\<=\active 5465 \catcode`\>=\active 5466 \catcode`\\=\active 5467 \catcode`\^=\active 5468 \catcode`\_=\active 5469 \catcode`\|=\active 5470 \catcode`\~=\active 5471} 5472 5473 5474% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 5475\def\readtocfile{% 5476 \setupdatafile 5477 \activecatcodes 5478 \input \tocreadfilename 5479} 5480 5481\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 5482\newcount\savepageno 5483\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 5484 5485% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 5486% 5487\def\startcontents#1{% 5488 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 5489 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 5490 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 5491 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 5492 \contentsalignmacro 5493 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 5494 % 5495 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 5496 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 5497 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5498 % 5499 \savepageno = \pageno 5500 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 5501 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 5502 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 5503 % 5504 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 5505 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 5506} 5507 5508% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 5509% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 5510% 5511\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 5512 5513% Normal (long) toc. 5514% 5515\def\contents{% 5516 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 5517 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5518 \ifeof 1 \else 5519 \readtocfile 5520 \fi 5521 \vfill \eject 5522 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5523 \ifeof 1 \else 5524 \pdfmakeoutlines 5525 \fi 5526 \closein 1 5527 \endgroup 5528 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5529 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5530} 5531 5532% And just the chapters. 5533\def\summarycontents{% 5534 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 5535 % 5536 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 5537 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 5538 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 5539 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 5540 \secfonts 5541 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 5542 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 5543 \rm 5544 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 5545 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 5546 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 5547 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 5548 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 5549 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5550 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5551 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5552 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5553 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5554 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5555 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5556 \ifeof 1 \else 5557 \readtocfile 5558 \fi 5559 \closein 1 5560 \vfill \eject 5561 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5562 \endgroup 5563 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5564 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5565} 5566\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 5567 5568% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 5569% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 5570% 5571\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 5572 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 5573 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 5574 % But use \hss just in case. 5575 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 5576 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 5577 % 5578 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 5579 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 5580 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 5581 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 5582 % there are before deciding ... 5583 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 5584} 5585 5586% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 5587% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 5588% The last argument is the page number. 5589% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 5590 5591% Chapters, in the main contents. 5592\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5593% 5594% Chapters, in the short toc. 5595% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 5596\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 5597 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 5598} 5599 5600% Appendices, in the main contents. 5601% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 5602% 5603\def\appendixbox#1{% 5604 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 5605 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 5606 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 5607% 5608\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5609 5610% Unnumbered chapters. 5611\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 5612\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 5613 5614% Sections. 5615\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5616\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 5617\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 5618 5619% Subsections. 5620\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5621\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 5622\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5623 5624% And subsubsections. 5625\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5626\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 5627\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5628 5629% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 5630% Same as \defaultparindent. 5631\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 5632 5633% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 5634% page number. 5635% 5636% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 5637% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 5638\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 5639 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 5640 \begingroup 5641 \chapentryfonts 5642 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5643 \endgroup 5644 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 5645} 5646 5647\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5648 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 5649 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5650\endgroup} 5651 5652\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5653 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 5654 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5655\endgroup} 5656 5657\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5658 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 5659 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5660\endgroup} 5661 5662% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 5663\let\tocentry = \entry 5664 5665% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 5666\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 5667 5668\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5669\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5670 5671\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 5672\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 5673\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5674\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5675 5676 5677\message{environments,} 5678% @foo ... @end foo. 5679 5680% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 5681% 5682% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 5683% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 5684% 5685\def\point{$\star$} 5686\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 5687\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 5688\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 5689\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 5690\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 5691 5692% The @error{} command. 5693% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 5694% 5695\newbox\errorbox 5696% 5697{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 5698\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 5699% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 5700\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} 5701% 5702\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 5703 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 5704 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 5705 \vbox{% 5706 \hrule height\dimen2 5707 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 5708 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 5709 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 5710 \hrule height\dimen2} 5711 \hfil} 5712% 5713\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 5714 5715% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 5716% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 5717% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 5718 5719\envdef\tex{% 5720 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 5721 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 5722 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 5723 \catcode `\%=14 5724 \catcode `\+=\other 5725 \catcode `\"=\other 5726 \catcode `\|=\other 5727 \catcode `\<=\other 5728 \catcode `\>=\other 5729 \escapechar=`\\ 5730 % 5731 \let\b=\ptexb 5732 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 5733 \let\c=\ptexc 5734 \let\,=\ptexcomma 5735 \let\.=\ptexdot 5736 \let\dots=\ptexdots 5737 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 5738 \let\!=\ptexexclam 5739 \let\i=\ptexi 5740 \let\indent=\ptexindent 5741 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 5742 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 5743 \let\+=\tabalign 5744 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 5745 \let\/=\ptexslash 5746 \let\*=\ptexstar 5747 \let\t=\ptext 5748 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer 5749 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 5750 % 5751 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 5752 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 5753 \def\@{@}% 5754} 5755% There is no need to define \Etex. 5756 5757% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 5758% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 5759% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 5760 5761% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 5762\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 5763 5764% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 5765% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 5766% have any width. 5767\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 5768 5769% This space is always present above and below environments. 5770\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 5771 5772% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 5773% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 5774% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 5775% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 5776% 5777\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 5778 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 5779 % \sectionheading, q.v. 5780 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 5781 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 5782 \endgraf 5783 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 5784 \removelastskip 5785 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 5786 % or better ... 5787 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 5788 \vskip\envskipamount 5789 \fi 5790 \fi 5791}} 5792 5793\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 5794 5795% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 5796% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 5797\let\nonarrowing=\relax 5798 5799% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 5800% environment contents. 5801\font\circle=lcircle10 5802\newdimen\circthick 5803\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 5804\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 5805\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 5806% 5807\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 5808\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 5809\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 5810\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 5811\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5812 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 5813 \hskip\rskip}} 5814\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5815 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 5816 \hskip\rskip}} 5817% 5818\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 5819 5820\envdef\cartouche{% 5821 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 5822 \startsavinginserts 5823 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 5824 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 5825 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 5826 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 5827 \cartouter=\hsize 5828 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 5829 % side, and for 6pt waste from 5830 % each corner char, and rule thickness 5831 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 5832 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 5833 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5834 \vbox\bgroup 5835 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 5836 \carttop 5837 \hbox\bgroup 5838 \hskip\lskip 5839 \vrule\kern3pt 5840 \vbox\bgroup 5841 \kern3pt 5842 \hsize=\cartinner 5843 \baselineskip=\normbskip 5844 \lineskip=\normlskip 5845 \parskip=\normpskip 5846 \vskip -\parskip 5847 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 5848} 5849\def\Ecartouche{% 5850 \ifhmode\par\fi 5851 \kern3pt 5852 \egroup 5853 \kern3pt\vrule 5854 \hskip\rskip 5855 \egroup 5856 \cartbot 5857 \egroup 5858 \checkinserts 5859} 5860 5861 5862% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 5863% inside a group. 5864\def\nonfillstart{% 5865 \aboveenvbreak 5866 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 5867 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 5868 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 5869 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 5870 \parskip = 0pt 5871 \parindent = 0pt 5872 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 5873 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5874 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5875 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 5876 \else 5877 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5878 \fi 5879 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 5880} 5881 5882% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 5883% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 5884% This affects the following displayed environments: 5885% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 5886% 5887\def\smallword{small} 5888\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 5889\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 5890\def\setnormaldispenv{% 5891 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 5892 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 5893 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 5894 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 5895 % to change the fonts afterward. 5896 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5897 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5898 \fi 5899} 5900\def\setsmalldispenv{% 5901 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 5902 \else 5903 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5904 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5905 \fi 5906} 5907 5908% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 5909% Let's do it by one command: 5910\def\makedispenv #1#2{ 5911 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 5912 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 5913 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5914 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5915} 5916 5917% Define two synonyms: 5918\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 5919 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 5920 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 5921} 5922 5923% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 5924% 5925% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 5926% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 5927% 5928\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 5929 \nonfillstart 5930 \tt\quoteexpand 5931 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 5932 \gobble % eat return 5933} 5934% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 5935% 5936\makedispenv {display}{% 5937 \nonfillstart 5938 \gobble 5939} 5940 5941% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 5942% 5943\makedispenv{format}{% 5944 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5945 \nonfillstart 5946 \gobble 5947} 5948 5949% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 5950\envdef\flushleft{% 5951 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5952 \nonfillstart 5953 \gobble 5954} 5955\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 5956 5957% @flushright. 5958% 5959\envdef\flushright{% 5960 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5961 \nonfillstart 5962 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5963 \gobble 5964} 5965\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 5966 5967 5968% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 5969% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 5970% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 5971% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 5972% 5973\envdef\quotation{% 5974 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 5975 \parindent=0pt 5976 % 5977 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 5978 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5979 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5980 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 5981 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 5982 \else 5983 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5984 \fi 5985 \parsearg\quotationlabel 5986} 5987 5988% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 5989% doing normal filling. 5990% 5991\def\Equotation{% 5992 \par 5993 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 5994 % indent a bit. 5995 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 5996 \fi 5997 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 5998} 5999 6000% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 6001\def\quotationlabel#1{% 6002 \def\temp{#1}% 6003 \ifx\temp\empty \else 6004 {\bf #1: }% 6005 \fi 6006} 6007 6008 6009% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 6010% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 6011% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 6012% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 6013% 6014% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6015% 6016% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6017% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6018% verbatim line. 6019\def\dospecials{% 6020 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6021 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6022 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6023} 6024% 6025% [Knuth] p. 380 6026\def\uncatcodespecials{% 6027 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6028% 6029% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 6030% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font 6031\begingroup 6032 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} 6033\endgroup 6034% 6035% Setup for the @verb command. 6036% 6037% Eight spaces for a tab 6038\begingroup 6039 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6040 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6041\endgroup 6042% 6043\def\setupverb{% 6044 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6045 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6046 \catcode`\`=\active 6047 \tabeightspaces 6048 % Respect line breaks, 6049 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6050 % make each space count 6051 % must do in this order: 6052 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6053} 6054 6055% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6056% 6057% Real tab expansion 6058\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6059% 6060\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 6061 6062% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right 6063% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote 6064% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it 6065% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least 6066% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the 6067% regular 0x27. 6068% 6069\def\codequoteright{% 6070 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6071 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6072 '% 6073 \else \char'15 \fi 6074 \else \char'15 \fi 6075} 6076% 6077% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 6078% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 6079% the code environments to do likewise. 6080% 6081\def\codequoteleft{% 6082 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6083 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6084 `% 6085 \else \char'22 \fi 6086 \else \char'22 \fi 6087} 6088% 6089\begingroup 6090 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6091 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6092 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6093 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6094 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6095 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 6096 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6097 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6098 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 6099 }% 6100 } 6101 \catcode`\'=\active 6102 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}% 6103 % 6104 \catcode`\`=\active 6105 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}% 6106 % 6107 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}% 6108\endgroup 6109 6110% start the verbatim environment. 6111\def\setupverbatim{% 6112 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6113 \nonfillstart 6114 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6115 \tt 6116 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 6117 \catcode`\`=\active 6118 \tabexpand 6119 \quoteexpand 6120 % Respect line breaks, 6121 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6122 % make each space count 6123 % must do in this order: 6124 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6125 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6126} 6127 6128% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6129% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6130% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6131% 6132% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6133% 6134% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6135\begingroup 6136 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6137 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6138\endgroup 6139% 6140\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6141% 6142% 6143% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6144% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6145% 6146% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6147% 6148% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6149% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6150% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6151% 6152% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6153% 6154\begingroup 6155 \catcode`\ =\active 6156 \obeylines % 6157 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6158 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6159 % line in the output. 6160 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6161 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6162 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6163\endgroup 6164% 6165\envdef\verbatim{% 6166 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6167} 6168\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6169 6170 6171% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6172% 6173\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6174% 6175\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6176 {% 6177 \makevalueexpandable 6178 \setupverbatim 6179 \input #1 6180 \afterenvbreak 6181 }% 6182} 6183 6184% @copying ... @end copying. 6185% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6186% 6187% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6188% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6189% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6190% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6191% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6192% possible is very desirable. 6193% 6194\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6195\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6196% 6197\def\insertcopying{% 6198 \begingroup 6199 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6200 \scanexp\copyingtext 6201 \endgroup 6202} 6203 6204 6205\message{defuns,} 6206% @defun etc. 6207 6208\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6209\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6210\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6211\newcount\defunpenalty 6212 6213% Start the processing of @deffn: 6214\def\startdefun{% 6215 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6216 \medbreak 6217 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6218 % following @def command, see below. 6219 \else 6220 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6221 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6222 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6223 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6224 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6225 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6226 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6227 % 6228 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6229 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6230 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6231 % @def command. 6232 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6233 % 6234 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6235 % But do insert the glue. 6236 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6237 \fi 6238 % 6239 \parindent=0in 6240 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6241 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6242} 6243 6244\def\dodefunx#1{% 6245 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6246 \checkenv#1% 6247 % 6248 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6249 % It's not a great place, though. 6250 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6251 % 6252 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6253 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6254} 6255\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6256 6257% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6258% 6259\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6260 \begingroup 6261 % call \deffnheader: 6262 #1#2 \endheader 6263 % common ending: 6264 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6265 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 6266 \endgraf 6267 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6268 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6269 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6270 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6271 \checkparencounts 6272 \endgroup 6273} 6274 6275\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6276 6277% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6278% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 6279% 6280\def\makedefun#1{% 6281 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6282 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6283 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6284 \temp 6285} 6286 6287% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6288% 6289% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6290% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6291% 6292\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6293 \envdef#1{% 6294 \startdefun 6295 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6296 }% 6297 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6298 \def#3% 6299} 6300 6301%%% Untyped functions: 6302 6303% @deffn category name args 6304\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6305 6306% @deffn category class name args 6307\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6308 6309% \defopon {category on}class name args 6310\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6311 6312% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6313% 6314\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6315 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6316 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6317 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6318} 6319 6320%%% Typed functions: 6321 6322% @deftypefn category type name args 6323\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6324 6325% @deftypeop category class type name args 6326\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6327 6328% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6329\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6330 6331% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6332% 6333\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6334 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6335 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6336} 6337 6338%%% Typed variables: 6339 6340% @deftypevr category type var args 6341\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6342 6343% @deftypecv category class type var args 6344\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6345 6346% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6347\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6348 6349% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6350% 6351\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6352 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6353 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6354} 6355 6356%%% Untyped variables: 6357 6358% @defvr category var args 6359\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6360 6361% @defcv category class var args 6362\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6363 6364% \defcvof {category of}class var args 6365\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6366 6367%%% Type: 6368% @deftp category name args 6369\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6370 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6371 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6372} 6373 6374% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6375\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6376\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6377\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6378\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6379\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6380\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6381\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6382\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6383\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6384\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6385\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6386 6387% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6388% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6389% #2 is the return type, if any. 6390% #3 is the function name. 6391% 6392% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6393% 6394\def\defname#1#2#3{% 6395 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 6396 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 6397 % 6398 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 6399 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 6400 % just below it. 6401 \def\temp{#1}% 6402 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 6403 % 6404 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 6405 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 6406 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 6407 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 6408 % The continuations: 6409 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 6410 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 6411 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 6412 % 6413 % Put the type name to the right margin. 6414 \noindent 6415 \hbox to 0pt{% 6416 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 6417 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 6418 \kern\leftskip 6419 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 6420 }% 6421 % 6422 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 6423 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 6424 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6425 {% 6426 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 6427 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 6428 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 6429 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 6430 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 6431 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 6432 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 6433 % one has made identifiers using them :). 6434 \df \tt 6435 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 6436 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 6437 #3% output function name 6438 }% 6439 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 6440 % 6441 \boldbrax 6442 % arguments will be output next, if any. 6443} 6444 6445% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 6446% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 6447% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 6448% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 6449% 6450\def\defunargs#1{% 6451 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 6452 % tt for the names. 6453 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 6454 % 6455 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 6456 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 6457 \let\var=\ttslanted 6458 #1% 6459 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 6460} 6461 6462% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 6463% 6464\def\activeparens{% 6465 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 6466 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 6467 \catcode`\&=\active 6468} 6469 6470% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 6471\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 6472 6473% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 6474% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 6475% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 6476{ 6477 \activeparens 6478 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 6479 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 6480 \global\let& = \& 6481 6482 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 6483 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 6484} 6485 6486\newcount\parencount 6487 6488% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 6489\newif\ifampseen 6490\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 6491 6492\def\parenfont{% 6493 \ifampseen 6494 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 6495 % otherwise use the default font. 6496 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 6497 \else 6498 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 6499 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 6500 \sf 6501 \fi 6502} 6503\def\infirstlevel#1{% 6504 \ifampseen 6505 \ifnum\parencount=1 6506 #1% 6507 \fi 6508 \fi 6509} 6510\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 6511 6512\def\opnr{% 6513 \global\advance\parencount by 1 6514 {\parenfont(}% 6515 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 6516} 6517\def\clnr{% 6518 {\parenfont)}% 6519 \infirstlevel \sl 6520 \global\advance\parencount by -1 6521} 6522 6523\newcount\brackcount 6524\def\lbrb{% 6525 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 6526 {\bf[}% 6527} 6528\def\rbrb{% 6529 {\bf]}% 6530 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 6531} 6532 6533\def\checkparencounts{% 6534 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 6535 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 6536} 6537% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 6538% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 6539\def\badparencount{% 6540 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 6541 \global\parencount=0 6542} 6543\def\badbrackcount{% 6544 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 6545 \global\brackcount=0 6546} 6547 6548 6549\message{macros,} 6550% @macro. 6551 6552% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 6553% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 6554\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 6555 \newwrite\macscribble 6556 \def\scantokens#1{% 6557 \toks0={#1}% 6558 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 6559 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 6560 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 6561 \input \jobname.tmp 6562 } 6563\fi 6564 6565\def\scanmacro#1{% 6566 \begingroup 6567 \newlinechar`\^^M 6568 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 6569 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 6570 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 6571 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 6572 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 6573 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 6574 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 6575 % ... and \example 6576 \spaceisspace 6577 % 6578 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 6579 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 6580 % --kasal, 29nov03 6581 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 6582 \endgroup 6583} 6584 6585\def\scanexp#1{% 6586 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 6587 \temp 6588} 6589 6590\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 6591\newtoks\macname % Macro name 6592\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 6593 6594% List of all defined macros in the form 6595% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 6596% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 6597% if there is a need. 6598\def\macrolist{} 6599 6600% Add the macro to \macrolist 6601\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 6602\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 6603 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 6604 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 6605} 6606 6607% Utility routines. 6608% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 6609% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 6610% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 6611% 6612\def\cslet#1#2{% 6613 \expandafter\let 6614 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 6615 \csname#2\endcsname 6616} 6617 6618% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 6619% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 6620{\catcode`\@=11 6621\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 6622\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 6623\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 6624\def\unbrace#1{#1} 6625\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 6626} 6627 6628% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 6629{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 6630\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 6631\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 6632\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 6633} 6634 6635% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 6636% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 6637% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 6638 6639% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 6640% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 6641% confine the change to the current group. 6642 6643% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 6644% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 6645% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 6646 6647\def\scanctxt{% 6648 \catcode`\"=\other 6649 \catcode`\+=\other 6650 \catcode`\<=\other 6651 \catcode`\>=\other 6652 \catcode`\@=\other 6653 \catcode`\^=\other 6654 \catcode`\_=\other 6655 \catcode`\|=\other 6656 \catcode`\~=\other 6657 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 6658} 6659 6660\def\scanargctxt{% 6661 \scanctxt 6662 \catcode`\\=\other 6663 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6664} 6665 6666\def\macrobodyctxt{% 6667 \scanctxt 6668 \catcode`\{=\other 6669 \catcode`\}=\other 6670 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6671 \usembodybackslash 6672} 6673 6674\def\macroargctxt{% 6675 \scanctxt 6676 \catcode`\\=\other 6677} 6678 6679% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 6680% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 6681% where N is the macro parameter number. 6682% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 6683% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 6684 6685{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 6686 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 6687 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 6688} 6689\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 6690 6691\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 6692\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 6693 6694\def\macroxxx#1{% 6695 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 6696 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 6697 \paramno=0% 6698 \else 6699 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 6700 \fi 6701 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 6702 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 6703 \else 6704 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 6705 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 6706 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 6707 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 6708 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 6709 \fi 6710 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 6711 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 6712 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 6713 \fi} 6714 6715\parseargdef\unmacro{% 6716 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 6717 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 6718 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 6719 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 6720 \begingroup 6721 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 6722 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 6723 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 6724 \endgroup 6725 \else 6726 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 6727 \fi 6728} 6729 6730% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 6731% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 6732% 6733\def\unmacrodo#1{% 6734 \ifx #1\relax 6735 % remove this 6736 \else 6737 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 6738 \fi 6739} 6740 6741% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 6742% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 6743% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 6744\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 6745\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 6746\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 6747\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 6748 6749% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 6750% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 6751% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 6752% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 6753 6754% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 6755% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 6756% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 6757% it to # just before using the token list produced. 6758% 6759% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 6760% the macro is used. 6761 6762\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 6763 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 6764\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 6765 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 6766 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 6767 \advance\paramno by 1% 6768 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 6769 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 6770 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 6771 \fi\next} 6772 6773% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 6774% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 6775 6776\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 6777{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6778\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 6779{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6780 6781% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 6782% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 6783% Much magic with \expandafter here. 6784% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 6785% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 6786\def\defmacro{% 6787 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 6788 \ifrecursive 6789 \ifcase\paramno 6790 % 0 6791 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6792 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6793 \or % 1 6794 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6795 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6796 \noexpand\braceorline 6797 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6798 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6799 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6800 \else % many 6801 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6802 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6803 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6804 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6805 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6806 \expandafter\expandafter 6807 \expandafter\xdef 6808 \expandafter\expandafter 6809 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6810 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6811 \fi 6812 \else 6813 \ifcase\paramno 6814 % 0 6815 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6816 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6817 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6818 \or % 1 6819 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6820 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6821 \noexpand\braceorline 6822 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6823 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6824 \egroup 6825 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6826 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6827 \else % many 6828 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6829 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6830 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6831 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6832 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6833 \expandafter\expandafter 6834 \expandafter\xdef 6835 \expandafter\expandafter 6836 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6837 \paramlist{% 6838 \egroup 6839 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6840 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6841 \fi 6842 \fi} 6843 6844\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 6845 6846% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 6847% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 6848% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 6849% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 6850\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 6851\def\braceorlinexxx{% 6852 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 6853 \expandafter\parsearg 6854 \fi \macnamexxx} 6855 6856 6857% @alias. 6858% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 6859% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 6860\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 6861\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 6862\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 6863 {% 6864 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 6865 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 6866 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 6867 }% 6868 \next 6869} 6870 6871 6872\message{cross references,} 6873 6874\newwrite\auxfile 6875\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 6876\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 6877 6878% @inforef is relatively simple. 6879\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 6880\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 6881 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 6882 6883% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 6884% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 6885% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 6886% @node foo , bar , ... 6887% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 6888% 6889\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 6890% 6891% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 6892% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 6893\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 6894\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 6895 6896\let\nwnode=\node 6897\let\lastnode=\empty 6898 6899% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 6900% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 6901% 6902\def\donoderef#1{% 6903 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 6904 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 6905 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 6906 \fi 6907} 6908 6909% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 6910% 6911\newcount\savesfregister 6912% 6913\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 6914\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 6915\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 6916 6917% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 6918% anchor), which consists of three parts: 6919% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 6920% or the anchor name. 6921% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 6922% empty for anchors. 6923% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 6924% 6925% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 6926% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 6927% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 6928% 6929\def\setref#1#2{% 6930 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 6931 \iflinks 6932 {% 6933 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 6934 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 6935 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 6936 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 6937 }% 6938 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 6939 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 6940 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 6941 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout 6942 }% 6943 \fi 6944} 6945 6946% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 6947% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 6948% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 6949% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 6950% 6951\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6952\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6953\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6954\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 6955 \unsepspaces 6956 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 6957 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 6958 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 6959 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 6960 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 6961 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 6962 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 6963 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 6964 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6965 \else 6966 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 6967 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 6968 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6969 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 6970 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6971 \else 6972 \ifhavexrefs 6973 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 6974 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 6975 \else 6976 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 6977 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6978 \fi% 6979 \fi 6980 \fi 6981 \fi 6982 % 6983 % Make link in pdf output. 6984 \ifpdf 6985 {\indexnofonts 6986 \turnoffactive 6987 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 6988 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. 6989 \getfilename{#4}% 6990 % 6991 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. 6992 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 6993 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% 6994 % 6995 \leavevmode 6996 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6997 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 6998 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 6999 \else 7000 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 7001 \fi 7002 }% 7003 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 7004 \fi 7005 % 7006 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 7007 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 7008 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 7009 {% 7010 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 7011 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 7012 \indexnofonts 7013 \turnoffactive 7014 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 7015 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 7016 }% 7017 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 7018 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 7019 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 7020 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 7021 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 7022 \else 7023 \printedrefname 7024 \fi 7025 % 7026 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 7027 % "in MANUALNAME". 7028 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7029 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7030 \fi 7031 \else 7032 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7033 % 7034 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 7035 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 7036 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7037 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 7038 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 7039 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7040 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7041 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7042 \else 7043 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 7044 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 7045 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 7046 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 7047 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 7048 {\turnoffactive 7049 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 7050 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 7051 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 7052 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 7053 }% 7054 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 7055 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 7056 % 7057 % But we always want a comma and a space: 7058 ,\space 7059 % 7060 % output the `page 3'. 7061 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 7062 \fi 7063 \fi 7064 \endlink 7065\endgroup} 7066 7067% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 7068% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 7069% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 7070% one that Bob is working on :). 7071% 7072\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 7073 7074% Things referred to by \setref. 7075% 7076\def\Ynothing{} 7077\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 7078\def\Ynumbered{% 7079 \ifnum\secno=0 7080 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 7081 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7082 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 7083 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7084 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7085 \else 7086 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7087 \fi\fi\fi 7088} 7089\def\Yappendix{% 7090 \ifnum\secno=0 7091 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 7092 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7093 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 7094 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7095 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7096 \else 7097 \putwordSection@tie 7098 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7099 \fi\fi\fi 7100} 7101 7102% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 7103% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 7104% 7105\def\refx#1#2{% 7106 {% 7107 \indexnofonts 7108 \otherbackslash 7109 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 7110 \csname XR#1\endcsname 7111 }% 7112 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 7113 % If not defined, say something at least. 7114 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 7115 \iflinks 7116 \ifhavexrefs 7117 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 7118 \else 7119 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 7120 \global\warnedxrefstrue 7121 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 7122 \fi 7123 \fi 7124 \fi 7125 \else 7126 % It's defined, so just use it. 7127 \thisrefX 7128 \fi 7129 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 7130} 7131 7132% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 7133% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 7134% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 7135% 7136\def\xrdef#1#2{% 7137 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 7138 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 7139 % mess up the control sequence name. 7140 \indexnofonts 7141 \turnoffactive 7142 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 7143 }% 7144 % 7145 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 7146 % 7147 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 7148 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 7149 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 7150 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 7151 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 7152 % 7153 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 7154 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 7155 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 7156 \else 7157 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 7158 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 7159 \fi 7160 % 7161 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 7162 % for later use in \listoffloats. 7163 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 7164 {\safexrefname}}% 7165 \fi 7166} 7167 7168% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 7169% 7170\def\tryauxfile{% 7171 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 7172 \ifeof 1 \else 7173 \readdatafile{aux}% 7174 \global\havexrefstrue 7175 \fi 7176 \closein 1 7177} 7178 7179\def\setupdatafile{% 7180 \catcode`\^^@=\other 7181 \catcode`\^^A=\other 7182 \catcode`\^^B=\other 7183 \catcode`\^^C=\other 7184 \catcode`\^^D=\other 7185 \catcode`\^^E=\other 7186 \catcode`\^^F=\other 7187 \catcode`\^^G=\other 7188 \catcode`\^^H=\other 7189 \catcode`\^^K=\other 7190 \catcode`\^^L=\other 7191 \catcode`\^^N=\other 7192 \catcode`\^^P=\other 7193 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 7194 \catcode`\^^R=\other 7195 \catcode`\^^S=\other 7196 \catcode`\^^T=\other 7197 \catcode`\^^U=\other 7198 \catcode`\^^V=\other 7199 \catcode`\^^W=\other 7200 \catcode`\^^X=\other 7201 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 7202 \catcode`\^^[=\other 7203 \catcode`\^^\=\other 7204 \catcode`\^^]=\other 7205 \catcode`\^^^=\other 7206 \catcode`\^^_=\other 7207 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 7208 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 7209 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 7210 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 7211 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 7212 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 7213 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 7214 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 7215 % 7216 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 7217 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 7218 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 7219 % 7220 \catcode`\^=\other 7221 % 7222 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 7223 \catcode`\~=\other 7224 \catcode`\[=\other 7225 \catcode`\]=\other 7226 \catcode`\"=\other 7227 \catcode`\_=\other 7228 \catcode`\|=\other 7229 \catcode`\<=\other 7230 \catcode`\>=\other 7231 \catcode`\$=\other 7232 \catcode`\#=\other 7233 \catcode`\&=\other 7234 \catcode`\%=\other 7235 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 7236 % 7237 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 7238 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 7239 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 7240 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 7241 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 7242 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 7243 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 7244 \catcode`\\=\other 7245 % 7246 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 7247 {% 7248 \count1=128 7249 \def\loop{% 7250 \catcode\count1=\other 7251 \advance\count1 by 1 7252 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 7253 }% 7254 }% 7255 % 7256 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 7257 \catcode`\{=1 7258 \catcode`\}=2 7259 \catcode`\@=0 7260} 7261 7262\def\readdatafile#1{% 7263\begingroup 7264 \setupdatafile 7265 \input\jobname.#1 7266\endgroup} 7267 7268 7269\message{insertions,} 7270% including footnotes. 7271 7272\newcount \footnoteno 7273 7274% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 7275% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 7276% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 7277% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 7278% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 7279\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 7280 7281% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 7282\let\footnotestyle=\comment 7283 7284{\catcode `\@=11 7285% 7286% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 7287\gdef\footnote{% 7288 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7289 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7290 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 7291 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 7292 % 7293 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 7294 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 7295 \let\@sf\empty 7296 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 7297 % 7298 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 7299 \unskip 7300 \thisfootno\@sf 7301 \dofootnote 7302}% 7303 7304% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 7305% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 7306% 7307% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 7308% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 7309% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 7310% 7311\gdef\dofootnote{% 7312 \insert\footins\bgroup 7313 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 7314 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 7315 % So reset some parameters. 7316 \hsize=\pagewidth 7317 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 7318 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 7319 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 7320 \floatingpenalty\@MM 7321 \leftskip\z@skip 7322 \rightskip\z@skip 7323 \spaceskip\z@skip 7324 \xspaceskip\z@skip 7325 \parindent\defaultparindent 7326 % 7327 \smallfonts \rm 7328 % 7329 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 7330 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 7331 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 7332 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 7333 \let\noindent = \relax 7334 % 7335 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 7336 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 7337 \everypar = {\hang}% 7338 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 7339 % 7340 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 7341 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 7342 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 7343 \footstrut 7344 \futurelet\next\fo@t 7345} 7346}%end \catcode `\@=11 7347 7348% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 7349% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 7350% would be lost. 7351% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 7352% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 7353% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 7354 7355% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 7356% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 7357% out prematurely. 7358% 7359\def\startsavinginserts{% 7360 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 7361 \let\insert\saveinsert 7362 \else 7363 \let\checkinserts\relax 7364 \fi 7365} 7366 7367% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 7368% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 7369% 7370\def\saveinsert#1{% 7371 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 7372 \afterassignment\next 7373 % swallow the left brace 7374 \let\temp = 7375} 7376\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 7377\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 7378 7379\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 7380 7381\def\placesaveins#1{% 7382 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 7383 {\box#1}% 7384} 7385 7386% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 7387{ 7388 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 7389 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 7390} 7391 7392% initialization: 7393\def\newsaveins #1{% 7394 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 7395 \next 7396} 7397\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 7398 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 7399 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 7400 \checksaveins #1}% 7401} 7402 7403% initialize: 7404\let\checkinserts\empty 7405\newsaveins\footins 7406\newsaveins\margin 7407 7408 7409% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 7410% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 7411% 7412% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 7413% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 7414% undone and the next image would fail. 7415\openin 1 = epsf.tex 7416\ifeof 1 \else 7417 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 7418 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 7419 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 7420 \input epsf.tex 7421\fi 7422\closein 1 7423% 7424% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 7425\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 7426\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 7427 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 7428 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 7429% 7430\def\image#1{% 7431 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 7432 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 7433 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 7434 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 7435 \global\warnednoepsftrue 7436 \fi 7437 \else 7438 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 7439 \fi 7440} 7441% 7442% Arguments to @image: 7443% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 7444% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 7445% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 7446% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 7447% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 7448\newif\ifimagevmode 7449\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 7450 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 7451 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 7452 % If the image is by itself, center it. 7453 \ifvmode 7454 \imagevmodetrue 7455 \nobreak\medskip 7456 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 7457 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 7458 % above and below. 7459 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 7460 \nobreak 7461 \fi 7462 % 7463 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 7464 % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if 7465 % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. 7466 \noindent 7467 % 7468 % Output the image. 7469 \ifpdf 7470 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 7471 \else 7472 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 7473 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 7474 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 7475 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 7476 \fi 7477 % 7478 \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image 7479\endgroup} 7480 7481 7482% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 7483% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 7484% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 7485% 7486\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 7487 7488% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 7489\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 7490 7491% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 7492% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 7493% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 7494% 7495% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 7496% be referable. 7497% 7498% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 7499% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 7500% 7501% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 7502% chapter-level command. 7503\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 7504% 7505\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 7506 \let\thiscaption=\empty 7507 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 7508 % 7509 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 7510 % 7511 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 7512 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 7513 % 7514 \startsavinginserts 7515 % 7516 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 7517 \par 7518 % 7519 \vtop\bgroup 7520 \def\floattype{#1}% 7521 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 7522 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 7523 % 7524 \ifx\floattype\empty 7525 \let\safefloattype=\empty 7526 \else 7527 {% 7528 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7529 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7530 \indexnofonts 7531 \turnoffactive 7532 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7533 }% 7534 \fi 7535 % 7536 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 7537 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7538 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 7539 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 7540 % 7541 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 7542 \global\advance\floatno by 1 7543 % 7544 {% 7545 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 7546 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 7547 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 7548 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 7549 % lists of floats. 7550 % 7551 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 7552 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 7553 }% 7554 \fi 7555 % 7556 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 7557 \vskip\parskip 7558 % 7559 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 7560 \restorefirstparagraphindent 7561} 7562 7563% we have these possibilities: 7564% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 7565% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 7566% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 7567% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 7568% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 7569% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 7570% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 7571% @float & no caption: 7572% 7573\def\Efloat{% 7574 \let\floatident = \empty 7575 % 7576 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 7577 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 7578 % 7579 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 7580 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7581 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 7582 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 7583 \fi 7584 % the number. 7585 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7586 \fi 7587 % 7588 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 7589 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 7590 \let\captionline = \floatident 7591 % 7592 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 7593 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 7594 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 7595 \fi 7596 % 7597 % caption text. 7598 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 7599 \fi 7600 % 7601 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 7602 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 7603 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 7604 \vskip.5\parskip 7605 \captionline 7606 % 7607 % Space below caption. 7608 \vskip\parskip 7609 \fi 7610 % 7611 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 7612 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 7613 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7614 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 7615 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 7616 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 7617 {% 7618 \atdummies 7619 % 7620 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 7621 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 7622 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 7623 \scanexp{% 7624 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 7625 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 7626 \thiscaption 7627 \else 7628 \thisshortcaption 7629 \fi 7630 }% 7631 }% 7632 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 7633 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 7634 }% 7635 \fi 7636 \egroup % end of \vtop 7637 % 7638 % place the captured inserts 7639 % 7640 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 7641 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 7642 % float. --kasal, 26may04 7643 % 7644 \checkinserts 7645} 7646 7647% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 7648% 7649\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 7650 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 7651} 7652 7653% @caption, @shortcaption 7654% 7655\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 7656\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 7657\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 7658\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 7659 7660% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 7661% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 7662\def\getfloatno#1{% 7663 \ifx#1\relax 7664 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 7665 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 7666 % 7667 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 7668 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 7669 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 7670 \fi 7671 \let\floatno#1% 7672} 7673 7674% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 7675% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 7676% first read the @float command. 7677% 7678\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7679 7680% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 7681% distinguish floats from other xref types. 7682\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 7683 7684% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 7685% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 7686% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 7687% 7688\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 7689% 7690% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 7691% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 7692% 7693\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 7694 \def\temp{#1}% 7695 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 7696 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 7697} 7698 7699% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 7700% 7701\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 7702 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 7703 {% 7704 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7705 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7706 \indexnofonts 7707 \turnoffactive 7708 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7709 }% 7710 % 7711 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 7712 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 7713 \ifhavexrefs 7714 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 7715 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 7716 \fi 7717 \else 7718 \begingroup 7719 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 7720 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 7721 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 7722 \endgroup 7723 \fi 7724} 7725 7726% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 7727% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 7728% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 7729% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 7730% 7731% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 7732% they won't appear in the aux file). 7733% 7734\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 7735\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 7736 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 7737 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 7738 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 7739 % in pdf output. 7740 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 7741 % 7742 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 7743 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 7744 \writeentry 7745}} 7746 7747 7748\message{localization,} 7749 7750% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after 7751% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything 7752% properly. Single argument is the language (de) or locale (de_DE) 7753% abbreviation. It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file. 7754% 7755{ 7756 \catcode`\_ = \active 7757 \globaldefs=1 7758\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 7759 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 7760 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 7761 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 7762 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7763 \ifeof 1 7764 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 7765 \else 7766 \input txi-#1.tex 7767 \fi 7768 \closein 1 7769 \endgroup 7770\endgroup} 7771} 7772% 7773% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 7774% try txi-de.tex. 7775% 7776\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 7777 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7778 \ifeof 1 7779 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 7780 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 7781 \else 7782 \input txi-#1.tex 7783 \fi 7784 \closein 1 7785} 7786% 7787\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 7788is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory 7789should work if nowhere else does.} 7790 7791% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 7792% 7793\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 7794 \count255=128 7795 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7796 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 7797 \advance\count255 by 1 7798 \repeat 7799} 7800 7801\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 7802 \count255=128 7803 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7804 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 7805 \advance\count255 by 1 7806 \repeat 7807} 7808 7809% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 7810% according to the specified encoding. 7811% 7812\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 7813 % Encoding being declared for the document. 7814 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 7815 % 7816 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 7817 % to compare them with \ifx. 7818 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 7819 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 7820 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 7821 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 7822 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 7823 % 7824 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 7825 \asciichardefs 7826 % 7827 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 7828 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7829 \lattwochardefs 7830 % 7831 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 7832 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7833 \latonechardefs 7834 % 7835 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 7836 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7837 \latninechardefs 7838 % 7839 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 7840 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7841 \utfeightchardefs 7842 % 7843 \else 7844 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 7845 % 7846 \fi % utfeight 7847 \fi % latnine 7848 \fi % latone 7849 \fi % lattwo 7850 \fi % ascii 7851} 7852 7853% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 7854% the default font encoding (OT1). 7855% 7856\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 7857 7858% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 7859\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 7860 7861% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 7862% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 7863% macros containing the character definitions. 7864\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7865% 7866% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 7867\def\latonechardefs{% 7868 \gdef^^a0{~} 7869 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 7870 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 7871 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 7872 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7873 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 7874 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 7875 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7876 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7877 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 7878 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 7879 \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7880 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 7881 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7882 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 7883 \gdef^^af{\={}} 7884 % 7885 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7886 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 7887 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 7888 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 7889 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7890 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 7891 \gdef^^b6{\P} 7892 % 7893 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 7894 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7895 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 7896 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 7897 % 7898 \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7899 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 7900 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 7901 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 7902 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 7903 % 7904 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 7905 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7906 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7907 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 7908 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7909 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 7910 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 7911 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7912 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 7913 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7914 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 7915 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 7916 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 7917 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 7918 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 7919 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 7920 % 7921 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} 7922 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 7923 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 7924 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 7925 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 7926 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 7927 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 7928 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 7929 \gdef^^d8{\O} 7930 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 7931 \gdef^^da{\'U} 7932 \gdef^^db{\^U} 7933 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 7934 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 7935 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} 7936 \gdef^^df{\ss} 7937 % 7938 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 7939 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 7940 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 7941 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 7942 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 7943 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 7944 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 7945 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 7946 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 7947 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 7948 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 7949 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 7950 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 7951 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 7952 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 7953 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 7954 % 7955 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} 7956 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 7957 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 7958 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 7959 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 7960 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 7961 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 7962 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 7963 \gdef^^f8{\o} 7964 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 7965 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 7966 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 7967 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 7968 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 7969 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} 7970 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 7971} 7972 7973% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 7974\def\latninechardefs{% 7975 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 7976 \latonechardefs 7977 % 7978 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 7979 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 7980 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 7981 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 7982 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 7983 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 7984 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 7985 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 7986} 7987 7988% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 7989\def\lattwochardefs{% 7990 \gdef^^a0{~} 7991 \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7992 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 7993 \gdef^^a3{\L} 7994 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7995 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 7996 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 7997 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7998 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7999 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 8000 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 8001 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 8002 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 8003 \gdef^^ad{\-} 8004 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 8005 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 8006 % 8007 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 8008 \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 8009 \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}} 8010 \gdef^^b3{\l} 8011 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 8012 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 8013 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 8014 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 8015 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 8016 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 8017 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 8018 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 8019 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 8020 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 8021 \gdef^^be{\v z} 8022 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 8023 % 8024 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 8025 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8026 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8027 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 8028 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8029 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 8030 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 8031 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8032 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 8033 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8034 \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8035 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8036 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 8037 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8038 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8039 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 8040 % 8041 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8042 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 8043 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 8044 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8045 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8046 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 8047 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8048 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8049 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 8050 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 8051 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8052 \gdef^^db{\H U} 8053 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8054 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8055 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 8056 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8057 % 8058 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 8059 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8060 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8061 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 8062 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8063 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 8064 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 8065 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8066 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 8067 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8068 \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8069 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8070 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 8071 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} 8072 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} 8073 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 8074 % 8075 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8076 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 8077 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 8078 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8079 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8080 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 8081 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8082 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8083 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 8084 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 8085 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8086 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 8087 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8088 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8089 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 8090 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 8091} 8092 8093% UTF-8 character definitions. 8094% 8095% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 8096% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 8097% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 8098% 8099\newcount\countUTFx 8100\newcount\countUTFy 8101\newcount\countUTFz 8102 8103\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 8104 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 8105% 8106\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 8107 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 8108% 8109\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 8110 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 8111 8112\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 8113 \ifx #1\relax 8114 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 8115 \else 8116 \expandafter #1% 8117 \fi 8118} 8119 8120\begingroup 8121 \catcode`\~13 8122 \catcode`\"12 8123 8124 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 8125 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 8126 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 8127 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 8128 \advance\countUTFx by 1 8129 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 8130 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 8131 \fi} 8132 8133 \countUTFx = "C2 8134 \countUTFy = "E0 8135 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8136 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 8137 \UTFviiiLoop 8138 8139 \countUTFx = "E0 8140 \countUTFy = "F0 8141 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8142 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 8143 \UTFviiiLoop 8144 8145 \countUTFx = "F0 8146 \countUTFy = "F4 8147 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8148 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 8149 \UTFviiiLoop 8150\endgroup 8151 8152\begingroup 8153 \catcode`\"=12 8154 \catcode`\<=12 8155 \catcode`\.=12 8156 \catcode`\,=12 8157 \catcode`\;=12 8158 \catcode`\!=12 8159 \catcode`\~=13 8160 8161 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 8162 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 8163 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 8164 \begingroup 8165 \parseXMLCharref 8166 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 8167 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 8168 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 8169 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 8170 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 8171 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 8172 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8173 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8174 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 8175 \endgroup} 8176 8177 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 8178 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 8179 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8180 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 8181 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 8182 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8183 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 8184 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 8185 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8186 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8187 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 8188 \else 8189 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8190 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8191 \parseUTFviiiA!% 8192 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 8193 \fi\fi\fi 8194 } 8195 8196 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 8197 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 8198 \divide\countUTFz by 64 8199 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 8200 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 8201 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 8202 \advance\countUTFx by 128 8203 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 8204 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 8205 8206 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 8207 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 8208 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 8209 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 8210\endgroup 8211 8212\def\utfeightchardefs{% 8213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 8214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 8215 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 8216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 8217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 8218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 8219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 8220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 8221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 8222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 8223 8224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 8225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 8226 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 8227 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 8228 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 8229 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 8230 8231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 8232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 8233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 8234 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 8235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 8236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 8237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 8238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 8239 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 8240 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 8241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 8242 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 8243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 8244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 8245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 8246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 8247 8248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 8249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 8250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 8251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 8252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 8253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 8254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 8255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 8256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 8257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 8258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 8259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 8260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 8261 8262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 8263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 8264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 8265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 8266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 8267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 8268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 8269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 8270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 8271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 8272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 8273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 8274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 8275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 8276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 8277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 8278 8279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 8280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 8281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 8282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 8283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 8284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 8285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 8286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 8287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 8288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 8289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 8290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 8291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 8292 8293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 8294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 8295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 8296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 8297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 8298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 8299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 8300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 8301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 8302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 8303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 8304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 8305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 8306 8307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 8308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 8309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 8310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 8311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 8312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 8313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 8314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 8315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 8316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 8317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 8318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 8319 8320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 8321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 8322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 8323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 8324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 8325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 8326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 8327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 8328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 8329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 8330 8331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 8332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 8333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 8334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 8335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 8336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 8337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 8338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 8339 8340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 8341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 8342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 8343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 8344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 8345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 8346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 8347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 8348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 8349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 8350 8351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 8352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 8353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 8354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 8355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 8356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 8357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 8358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 8359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 8360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 8361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 8362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 8363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 8364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 8365 8366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 8367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 8368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 8369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 8370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 8371 8372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 8373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 8374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 8375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 8376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 8377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 8378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 8379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 8380 8381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 8382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 8383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 8384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 8385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 8386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 8387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 8388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 8389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 8390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 8391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 8392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 8393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 8394 8395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 8396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 8397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 8398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 8399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 8400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 8401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 8402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 8403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 8404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 8405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 8406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 8407 8408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 8409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 8410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 8411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 8412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 8413 8414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 8415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 8416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 8417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 8418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 8419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 8420 8421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 8422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 8423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 8424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 8425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 8426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 8427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 8428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 8429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 8430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 8431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 8432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 8433 8434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 8435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 8436 8437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 8438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 8439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 8440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 8441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 8442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 8443 8444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 8445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 8446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 8447 8448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 8449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 8450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 8451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 8452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 8453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 8454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 8455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 8456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 8457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 8458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 8459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 8460 8461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 8462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 8463 8464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 8465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 8466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 8467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 8468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 8469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 8470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 8471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 8472 8473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 8474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 8475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 8476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 8477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 8478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 8479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 8480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 8481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 8482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 8483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 8485 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 8488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 8494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 8496 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 8499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 8501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 8507 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 8516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 8518 8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 8521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 8523 8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 8529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 8532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 8534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 8536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 8540 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 8551 8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 8553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 8554 8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 8559 8560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 8561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 8562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 8563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 8564 8565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 8566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 8567 8568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 8569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 8570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 8571 8572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 8573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 8574 8575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 8576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 8577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 8578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 8579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 8580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 8581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 8582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 8583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 8584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 8585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 8586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 8587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 8588 8589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 8590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 8591 8592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 8593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 8594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 8595}% end of \utfeightchardefs 8596 8597 8598% US-ASCII character definitions. 8599\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 8600 \relax 8601} 8602 8603% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 8604% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 8605% document encoding. 8606% 8607\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 8608 8609 8610\message{formatting,} 8611 8612\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 8613 8614\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 8615\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 8616\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 8617 8618% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 8619\vbadness = 10000 8620 8621% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 8622\hbadness = 2000 8623 8624% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 8625\widowpenalty=10000 8626\clubpenalty=10000 8627 8628% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 8629% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 8630% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 8631% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 8632% 8633\def\setemergencystretch{% 8634 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 8635 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 8636 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 8637 \else 8638 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 8639 \fi 8640} 8641 8642% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 8643% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 8644% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 8645% 8646% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 8647% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 8648% 8649\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 8650 \voffset = #3\relax 8651 \topskip = #6\relax 8652 \splittopskip = \topskip 8653 % 8654 \vsize = #1\relax 8655 \advance\vsize by \topskip 8656 \outervsize = \vsize 8657 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 8658 \pageheight = \vsize 8659 % 8660 \hsize = #2\relax 8661 \outerhsize = \hsize 8662 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 8663 \pagewidth = \hsize 8664 % 8665 \normaloffset = #4\relax 8666 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 8667 % 8668 \ifpdf 8669 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 8670 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 8671 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 8672 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 8673 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 8674 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 8675 \fi 8676 % 8677 \setleading{\textleading} 8678 % 8679 \parindent = \defaultparindent 8680 \setemergencystretch 8681} 8682 8683% @letterpaper (the default). 8684\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8685 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8686 \textleading = 13.2pt 8687 % 8688 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 8689 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 8690 {\voffset}{.25in}% 8691 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 8692 {11in}{8.5in}% 8693}} 8694 8695% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 8696\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8697 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 8698 \textleading = 12pt 8699 % 8700 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 8701 {-.2in}{0in}% 8702 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 8703 {9.25in}{7in}% 8704 % 8705 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 8706 \tolerance = 700 8707 \hfuzz = 1pt 8708 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8709 \defbodyindent = .5cm 8710}} 8711 8712% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 8713% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 8714\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8715 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 8716 \textleading = 12pt 8717 % 8718 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 8719 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 8720 {0pt}{14pt}% 8721 {9in}{6in}% 8722 % 8723 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 8724 \tolerance = 700 8725 \hfuzz = 1pt 8726 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8727 \defbodyindent = .4cm 8728}} 8729 8730% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 8731\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8732 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8733 \textleading = 13.2pt 8734 % 8735 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 8736 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 8737 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 8738 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 8739 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 8740 % your texinfo source file like this: 8741 % @tex 8742 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 8743 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 8744 % @end tex 8745 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 8746 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8747 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8748 {297mm}{210mm}% 8749 % 8750 \tolerance = 700 8751 \hfuzz = 1pt 8752 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8753 \defbodyindent = 5mm 8754}} 8755 8756% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 8757% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 8758% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 8759\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8760 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 8761 \textleading = 12.5pt 8762 % 8763 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 8764 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8765 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 8766 {210mm}{148mm}% 8767 % 8768 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 8769 \tolerance = 800 8770 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 8771 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8772 \defbodyindent = 2mm 8773 \tableindent = 12mm 8774}} 8775 8776% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 8777\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 8778 \afourpaper 8779 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 8780 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 8781 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8782 {297mm}{210mm}% 8783 % 8784 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 8785 \globaldefs = 0 8786}} 8787 8788% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 8789\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 8790 \afourpaper 8791 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 8792 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 8793 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8794 {297mm}{210mm}% 8795 \globaldefs = 0 8796}} 8797 8798% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 8799% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 8800% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 8801% 8802\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 8803\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 8804 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 8805 \globaldefs = 1 8806 % 8807 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8808 \setleading{\textleading}% 8809 % 8810 \dimen0 = #1\relax 8811 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 8812 % 8813 \dimen2 = \hsize 8814 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 8815 % 8816 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 8817 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 8818 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8819 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 8820}} 8821 8822% Set default to letter. 8823% 8824\letterpaper 8825 8826 8827\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 8828 8829% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 8830\catcode`\"=\other 8831\catcode`\~=\other 8832\catcode`\^=\other 8833\catcode`\_=\other 8834\catcode`\|=\other 8835\catcode`\<=\other 8836\catcode`\>=\other 8837\catcode`\+=\other 8838\catcode`\$=\other 8839\def\normaldoublequote{"} 8840\def\normaltilde{~} 8841\def\normalcaret{^} 8842\def\normalunderscore{_} 8843\def\normalverticalbar{|} 8844\def\normalless{<} 8845\def\normalgreater{>} 8846\def\normalplus{+} 8847\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 8848 8849% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 8850% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 8851% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 8852% 8853% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 8854% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 8855% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 8856% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 8857% 8858\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8859 8860% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 8861% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 8862% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 8863% this is not a problem. 8864\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8865 8866% Turn off all special characters except @ 8867% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 8868% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 8869% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 8870 8871\catcode`\"=\active 8872\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 8873\let"=\activedoublequote 8874\catcode`\~=\active 8875\def~{{\tt\char126}} 8876\chardef\hat=`\^ 8877\catcode`\^=\active 8878\def^{{\tt \hat}} 8879 8880\catcode`\_=\active 8881\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 8882\let\realunder=_ 8883% Subroutine for the previous macro. 8884\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 8885 8886\catcode`\|=\active 8887\def|{{\tt\char124}} 8888\chardef \less=`\< 8889\catcode`\<=\active 8890\def<{{\tt \less}} 8891\chardef \gtr=`\> 8892\catcode`\>=\active 8893\def>{{\tt \gtr}} 8894\catcode`\+=\active 8895\def+{{\tt \char 43}} 8896\catcode`\$=\active 8897\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 8898 8899% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 8900% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 8901% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 8902% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 8903\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 8904 8905% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 8906% parsing them. 8907\def\turnoffactive{% 8908 \normalturnoffactive 8909 \otherbackslash 8910} 8911 8912\catcode`\@=0 8913 8914% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 8915% as in \char`\\. 8916\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 8917\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 8918 8919% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 8920% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 8921{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 8922 8923% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 8924% in fixed width font. 8925\catcode`\\=\active 8926@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} 8927% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 8928% @let \ = @normalbackslash 8929 8930% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 8931% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 8932% catcode other. 8933@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 8934@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 8935 8936% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 8937% the literal character `\'. 8938% 8939@def@normalturnoffactive{% 8940 @let\=@normalbackslash 8941 @let"=@normaldoublequote 8942 @let~=@normaltilde 8943 @let^=@normalcaret 8944 @let_=@normalunderscore 8945 @let|=@normalverticalbar 8946 @let<=@normalless 8947 @let>=@normalgreater 8948 @let+=@normalplus 8949 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 8950 @unsepspaces 8951} 8952 8953% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 8954% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 8955@otherifyactive 8956 8957% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 8958% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 8959% a backslash. 8960% 8961@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 8962@global@let\ = @eatinput 8963 8964% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 8965% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 8966% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 8967% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 8968% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 8969% 8970@gdef@fixbackslash{% 8971 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 8972 @catcode`+=@active 8973 @catcode`@_=@active 8974} 8975 8976% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 8977@escapechar = `@@ 8978 8979% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 8980@catcode`@& = @other 8981@catcode`@# = @other 8982@catcode`@% = @other 8983 8984 8985@c Local variables: 8986@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 8987@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 8988@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 8989@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 8990@c time-stamp-end: "}" 8991@c End: 8992 8993@c vim:sw=2: 8994 8995@ignore 8996 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 8997@end ignore 8998